Sunteți pe pagina 1din 259

Revision 1.

imageRUNNER 2204/2004
Series
Service Manual
Introduction

Introduction
Important Notices

Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair
of products.
This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this manual that does
not apply to your locality.

Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products.
When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the
need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new
edition of this manual.

The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.

Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies.

Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, reproduced or
translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the consent of Canon Inc.
Copyright CANON INC. 2016

Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.

Explanation of Symbols
The following symbols are used throughout this Service Manual.

Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation


Check. Remove the claw.

1x

Check visually. Insert the claw.

1x

Check a sound. Push the part.


Introduction

Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation


Disconnect the connector. Connect the power cable.

1x

Connect the connector. Disconnect the power cable.

1x

Remove the cable/wire from the Turn on the power.


cable guide or wire saddle.
1x

Install the cable/wire to the cable Turn off the power.


guide or wire saddle.
1x

Remove the screw. Loosen the screw.

1x 1x

Install the screw. Tighten the screw.

1x 1x

Cleaning is needed. Measurement is needed.

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:


1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and
mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation.
In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol, the arrow
indicates the direction of the electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery unit
door, which results in supplying the machine with power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1' is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low".
(The voltage value, however, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD
signal goes on when '0'.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the operations
of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of
the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes, and
major changes will be communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service
Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults in the machine.
Contents

Contents
Safety Precautions...............................................................................................1
Laser Safety........................................................................................................................................ 2
Handling of Laser System................................................................................................................... 2
Turn Power Switch ON........................................................................................................................3
Power Supply...................................................................................................................................... 3
Safety of Toner....................................................................................................................................4
About Toner..........................................................................................................................................4
Toner on Clothing or Skin...................................................................................................................... 4
Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery............................................................................................. 4
Notes Before Servicing........................................................................................................................4
Points to Note at Cleaning...................................................................................................................5
Notes On Assembly/Disassembly....................................................................................................... 5
Notes on Assembly / Disassembly..........................................................................................................5

1. Product Overview.............................................................................................6
Product Lineup.................................................................................................................................... 7
Main Body............................................................................................................................................ 7
Pickup/Delivery System Option.............................................................................................................. 8
Scanning System Options......................................................................................................................9
Function Expansion System Options.................................................................................................... 10
Features............................................................................................................................................ 11
Product Feature.................................................................................................................................. 11
Specifications.................................................................................................................................... 12
Product Specifications......................................................................................................................... 12
Power Supply Specifications................................................................................................................ 13
Weight and Size..................................................................................................................................13
FAX Specifications.............................................................................................................................. 13
Productivity (Print Speed).................................................................................................................... 14
Paper Type.........................................................................................................................................14
Name of Parts................................................................................................................................... 16
External View......................................................................................................................................16
Cross Sectional View...........................................................................................................................18
Operation...........................................................................................................................................19
Power Switch......................................................................................................................................19
Control Panel......................................................................................................................................20

2. Technical Explanation................................................................................... 22
Basic Configuration........................................................................................................................... 23
Functional Configuration...................................................................................................................... 23
Basic Sequence.................................................................................................................................. 23
Original Exposure System.................................................................................................................24
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 24
Controls..............................................................................................................................................27
Controller System..............................................................................................................................34

i
Contents

Overview............................................................................................................................................ 34
Controls..............................................................................................................................................35
Laser Exposure System.................................................................................................................... 39
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 39
Controls..............................................................................................................................................40
Image Formation System.................................................................................................................. 44
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 44
Controls..............................................................................................................................................46
Fixing System....................................................................................................................................52
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 52
Controls..............................................................................................................................................53
Pickup/Feed System......................................................................................................................... 61
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 61
Controls..............................................................................................................................................65
Monitoring Function (e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote)............................................................ 72
Overview of System............................................................................................................................ 72
Service cautions..................................................................................................................................73
Setting Procedure............................................................................................................................... 73
Maintenace.........................................................................................................................................74

3. Periodical Service.......................................................................................... 76
Periodical Service Operation Item.....................................................................................................77

4. Disassembly/Assembly................................................................................. 79
List of Parts....................................................................................................................................... 80
List of External / Internal Cover............................................................................................................ 80
List of Main Unit.................................................................................................................................. 82
List of periodically replacement parts, consumable parts and locations for cleaning................................. 84
Clutch / Solenoid.................................................................................................................................85
Motor..................................................................................................................................................86
FAN................................................................................................................................................... 87
Heater / Others................................................................................................................................... 87
Sensor............................................................................................................................................... 89
PCB................................................................................................................................................... 90
External / Internal Cover....................................................................................................................91
Removing the Front Cover................................................................................................................... 91
Removing the Rear Cover....................................................................................................................91
Removing the Left Cover Unit.............................................................................................................. 91
Removing the Reader Rear Cover........................................................................................................92
Removing the Right Cover................................................................................................................... 93
Removing the Reader Front Cover....................................................................................................... 93
Removing the Cassette 1.....................................................................................................................94
Removing the Control Panel Unit..........................................................................................................94
Removing the Right Front Cover.......................................................................................................... 95
Removing the Delivery Tray Cover....................................................................................................... 95
Removing the Left Front Cover............................................................................................................ 96
Removing the Front Inner Cover.......................................................................................................... 96
Original Exposure..............................................................................................................................98
Removing the CIS Unit........................................................................................................................ 98

ii
Contents

Removing the Reader Upper Unit.........................................................................................................99


Removing the Reader Lower Unit....................................................................................................... 100
Removing the Reader Unit................................................................................................................. 101
Main Controller................................................................................................................................ 102
Removing the Controller PCB............................................................................................................ 102
Removing the Power Supply PCB...................................................................................................... 103
Removing the HVT PCB.................................................................................................................... 103
Removing the Fixing Cooling Fan....................................................................................................... 104
Removing the FAX Unit..................................................................................................................... 107
Removing the Control Panel...............................................................................................................107
Laser Exposure System.................................................................................................................. 109
Removing the Laser Scanner Unit...................................................................................................... 109
Image Formation System................................................................................................................ 110
Removing the Toner Cartridge........................................................................................................... 110
Removing the Drum Unit....................................................................................................................110
Removing the Developing Assembly...................................................................................................110
Removing the Developing Cylinder.....................................................................................................111
Removing the Transfer Roller.............................................................................................................112
Fixing System..................................................................................................................................113
Removing the Fixing Assembly.......................................................................................................... 113
Removing the Fixing Film Unit............................................................................................................114
Removing the Pressure Roller............................................................................................................115
Pickup/Feed System....................................................................................................................... 117
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller.................................................................................. 117
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad............................................................................... 118
Removing the Cassette 1 Separation Pad...........................................................................................118
Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Roller.............................................................................................. 119
Removing the Cassette 1 Feed Roller.................................................................................................120
Removing the Main Drive Unit............................................................................................................ 121
Removing the Registration Roller....................................................................................................... 122

5. Adjustment................................................................................................... 124
Overview......................................................................................................................................... 125
Basic Adjustment.............................................................................................................................. 125
Adjustment when Replacing the Parts.................................................................................................125
Basic Adjustment.............................................................................................................................126
Printer.............................................................................................................................................. 126
Adjustment when Replacing the Parts............................................................................................ 129
Original Exposure..............................................................................................................................129
Main Controller..................................................................................................................................131

6. Troubleshooting...........................................................................................133
Initial Check.....................................................................................................................................134
List of Initial Check Items................................................................................................................... 134
Test Print......................................................................................................................................... 135
Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 135
Steps to Select the Test Print TYPE................................................................................................... 135
How to Check Test Print.................................................................................................................... 135
Troubleshooting Items.....................................................................................................................138

iii
Contents

Troubleshooting items list.................................................................................................................. 138


Image Faults..................................................................................................................................... 138
Operation Faults................................................................................................................................141
Others.............................................................................................................................................. 142
Version Upgrade............................................................................................................................. 144
Outline..............................................................................................................................................144
System Requirements....................................................................................................................... 144
Preparation....................................................................................................................................... 144
Downloading System Software...........................................................................................................145
Upgrading via Internet....................................................................................................................... 147
Log Collector................................................................................................................................... 148
Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 148

7. Error/Jam/Alarm........................................................................................... 150
Outline............................................................................................................................................. 151
Location code................................................................................................................................... 151
Pickup position code..........................................................................................................................151
Report output example...................................................................................................................... 152
Error Code.......................................................................................................................................153
Error Code Details.............................................................................................................................153
Fax or scanned document error code..................................................................................................156
Jam Code........................................................................................................................................ 158
Main Unit (Included with the Cassette Feeding Module-AD1 and the Duplex Unit-C1)............................ 158
DADF-AM1....................................................................................................................................... 159
Alarm Code..................................................................................................................................... 160
Alarm Code Details........................................................................................................................... 160

8. Service Mode................................................................................................ 161


Overview......................................................................................................................................... 162
Outline of Service Mode.....................................................................................................................162
Backing up Service Mode.................................................................................................................. 162
Screen Flow of Service Mode.............................................................................................................163
COPIER...........................................................................................................................................164
DISPLAY.......................................................................................................................................... 164
I/O....................................................................................................................................................169
ADJUST........................................................................................................................................... 169
FUNCTION....................................................................................................................................... 175
OPTION .......................................................................................................................................... 181
COUNTER........................................................................................................................................187
FEEDER..........................................................................................................................................193
ADJUST........................................................................................................................................... 193
FUNCTION....................................................................................................................................... 194
FAX................................................................................................................................................. 196
List of SSSW.....................................................................................................................................196
List of MENU.....................................................................................................................................199
List of NUM.......................................................................................................................................200
Setting of NCU Parameters................................................................................................................202
TESTMODE.................................................................................................................................... 208
PRINT.............................................................................................................................................. 208

iv
Contents

FAX..................................................................................................................................................209

9. Installation.................................................................................................... 212
How to check this Installation Procedure........................................................................................ 213
Symbols in the Illustration.................................................................................................................. 213
Illustrations Used in This Procedure....................................................................................................213
Checking Before Installation............................................................................................................214
Checking Power Supply.....................................................................................................................214
Checking the Installation Environment................................................................................................ 214
Checking Installation Space............................................................................................................... 214
Points to Note on Installation..............................................................................................................214
Unpacking....................................................................................................................................... 215
Unpacking........................................................................................................................................ 215
Checking the Contents.................................................................................................................... 216
Installation Procedure......................................................................................................................217
Installing the Toner Cartridge............................................................................................................. 217
Setting the Cassettes.........................................................................................................................217
Connecting the cord.......................................................................................................................... 218
Host Machine Settings (Start Setup Guide)......................................................................................... 218
Connecting to the Network (Network Model only).................................................................................219
Connecting to Telephone Line (Fax Model only).................................................................................. 219
Platen Cover Type-X....................................................................................................................... 221
Checking Before Installation...............................................................................................................221
Checking the Contents...................................................................................................................... 221
Installation Procedure........................................................................................................................ 221
Checking after Installation..................................................................................................................222
Heater Kit-M2.................................................................................................................................. 223
Checking Before Installation...............................................................................................................223
Checking the Contents...................................................................................................................... 223
Installation Procedure........................................................................................................................ 223
Checking after Installation..................................................................................................................228
Cassette Heater Unit-40..................................................................................................................229
Checking before Installation............................................................................................................... 229
Installation Procedure........................................................................................................................ 229
Checking after Installation..................................................................................................................234
Handset-K1 Installation Procedure..................................................................................................235
Points to Note on Installation..............................................................................................................235
Checking the Contents...................................................................................................................... 235
Installation Outline Drawing................................................................................................................235
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power.................................................................................235
Installation Procedure........................................................................................................................ 235

APPENDICES....................................................................................................238
Service Tools...................................................................................................................................239
Special Tools.................................................................................................................................... 239
Oils and Solvents.............................................................................................................................. 239
General Timing Chart...................................................................................................................... 241
2 Prints, Continuous, Cassette 1........................................................................................................ 241
General Circuit Diagram..................................................................................................................242

v
Contents

General Circuit Diagram(1/4)..............................................................................................................242


General Circuit Diagram(1/4)..............................................................................................................243
General Circuit Diagram(3/4)..............................................................................................................244
General Circuit Diagram(4/4)..............................................................................................................245
Backup Data....................................................................................................................................246
Backup Data..................................................................................................................................... 246
Soft Counter Specifications............................................................................................................. 248
Soft Counter Specifications................................................................................................................ 248

vi
Safety Precautions
Laser Safety.......................................... 2
Handling of Laser System..................... 2
Turn Power Switch ON..........................3
Power Supply........................................ 3
Safety of Toner......................................4
Notes When Handling a Lithium
Battery............................................... 4
Notes Before Servicing......................... 4
Points to Note at Cleaning.................... 5
Notes On Assembly/Disassembly......... 5
Safety Precautions

Laser Safety
Since radiation emitted inside the machine is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam
cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation.
Therefore this machine is classified in Class 1 laser products that are regarded as safe during normal use according to
International Standard IEC60825-1.

Handling of Laser System


This machine is classified in Class 1 laser products.
However, inside the machine, Class 3B laser beam is emitted and is hazardous when entered into an eye.
When servicing the area around the laser assembly, be sure to turn off the main power.
If you must service while the power is turned on, be sure to keep the followings:
- Do not use a screwdriver or tools that have a high level of reflectance in the laser path.
- Remove watches and rings before starting the work. (They can reflect the laser beam, possibly hitting an eye.)
The machine's covers that confine laser beam radiation are identified by means of warning label (Figure). If you must open the
cover, be sure not to enter the laser beam into an eye during the work.
The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950-1).

Diese Maschine ist der Klasse 1 der Laserprodukte zugeordnet.


Innerhalb der Maschine wird jedoch ein Laserstrahl der Klasse 3B ausgestrahlt und es ist gefährlich, wenn dieser Strahl in die
Augen gerät.
Bei Servicearbeiten am oder in der Nähe des Laserteils zuerst das Hauptgerät abschalten.
Bei Servicearbeiten, die unbedingt bei eingeschaltetem Gerät durchgeführt werden müssen, auf jeden Fall die folgenden
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen beachten.
- Keine stark reflektierenden Schraubenzieher oder ähnliche Werkzeuge direkt in den Lichtpfad des Laserstrahls bringen.
- Vor Beginn der Arbeit Uhren, Ringe und ähnliche Gegenstände abnehmen. (Reflektierende Laserstrahlen könnten sonst in die
Augen geraten.)
Die Geräte-Abdeckungen, die Laserstrahlen reflektieren können, werden durch einen besonderen Warnaufkleber
gekennzeichnet (siehe Bild).
Muss die Abdeckung geöffnet werden, besondere Vorsicht walten lassen, damit der Laserstrahl nicht in die Augen gerät.

2
Safety Precautions

Turn Power Switch ON


The machine is equipped with 2 power switches: main power switch and control energy saver key.
The machine goes on when the main power switch is turned on (i.e., other than in low power mode, sleep mode).

Power Supply

CAUTION:
1. As a general rule, do not use extension cords. Using an extension cord may result in a fire or electrical shock. If an
extension cord must be used, however, use one for local rated voltage and over, untie the cord binding, and insert the
power plug completely into the extension cord outlet to ensure a firm connection between the power cord and the
extension cord.
2. The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.

3
Safety Precautions

Safety of Toner

About Toner
The machine's toner is a non-toxic material made of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye.

CAUTION:
Do not throw toner into fire. It may cause explosion.

Toner on Clothing or Skin


• If your clothing or skin has come into contact with toner, wipe it off with tissue; then, wash it off with water.
• Do not use warm water, which will cause the toner to jell and fuse permanently with the fibers of the cloth.
• Toner is easy to react with plastic material, avoid contact with plastic.

Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery

CAUTION:
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.

The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950).

CAUTION:
Wenn mit dem falschen Typ ausgewechselt, besteht Explosionsgefahr.
Gebrauchte Batterien gemäß der Anleitung beseitigen.

Notes Before Servicing

CAUTION:
At servicing, be sure to turn off the power source according to the specified steps and disconnect the power plug.

CAUTION:
Do not turn off the power switch when downloading is under way. Turning off the main power switch while downloading is
under way can disable the machine.

4
Safety Precautions

Points to Note at Cleaning

CAUTION:
When performing cleaning using organic solvent such as alcohol, be sure to check that the component of solvent is
vaporized completely before assembling.

Notes On Assembly/Disassembly

Notes on Assembly / Disassembly


Follow the items below to assemble/disassemble the device.
1. Disconnect the power plug to avoid any potential dangers during assembling/disassembling works.
2. If not specially instructed, reverse the order of disassembly to reinstall.
3. Ensure to use the right screw type (length, diameter, etc.) at the right position when assembling.
4. To keep electric conduction, binding screws with washers are used to attach the grounding wire and the varistor. Ensure to
use the right screw type when assembling.
5. Unless it is specially needed, do not operate the device with some parts removed.
6. Never remove the paint-locked screws when disassembling.
7. The fuse is mounted on the neutral line of The AC driver PCB. It may result in an electrical shock, in case that the power
plug is connected while assembling/disassembling after fuse blowing. Symbols or caution, shown below, is indicated on the
PCB also describes this note.

8. During disassembly, reassembly or transportation of the printer, remove the cartridge if required.
When the cartridge is out of the printer, put it in a protective bag even in a short period of time to prevent the adverse effect
of light.
9. Ground yourself by touching the metal part of the printer before handling the PCB to reduce the possibility of damage caused
by static electricity.
10. When you replace the part that the rating plate or the product code label is attached, be sure to remove the rating plate or
the product code label and put it to the new part.

5
1 Product Overview
Product Lineup...................................... 7
Features.............................................. 11
Specifications...................................... 12
Name of Parts..................................... 16
Operation............................................ 19
1. Product Overview

Product Lineup

Main Body

iR2204 iR2004
Network model Local print model Network model Local print model
Print Speed 22ppm 20ppm
Positioning Target machine: iR2202/2002 Series
LAN Port Yes - Yes -
USB Port Yes Yes Yes Yes
FAX Yes - - -
Wi-Fi Yes - Yes -
Option Conver- ADF Yes - Yes -
sion Duplex Unit Yes - Yes -
Cassette Feeding Module Yes - Yes -
Handset Yes - - -
FL Cassette Yes Yes Yes Yes
Heater Kit Yes Yes Yes Yes
CST HEATER UNIT Yes Yes Yes Yes
Platen Cover Yes Yes Yes Yes

7
1. Product Overview

Pickup/Delivery System Option


Cassette Heater Unit-40

Duplex Unit-C1

FL Cassette-BB1

Cassette Feeding
Module-AD1

Product name Required options, conditions, etc.


Cassette Feeding Module-AD1 Standard or option
FL Cassette-BB1 Option for 1st cassette of the main body
Duplex Unit-C1 Standard or option
Cassette Heater Unit-40 Heater Kit-M2 is required.

8
1. Product Overview

Scanning System Options


Platen Cover Type X

DADF-AT1

Product name Required options, conditions, etc.


DADF-AT1 Standard or option
Platen Cover Type X Standard or option

9
1. Product Overview

Function Expansion System Options


Heater Kit-M2

Handset-K1

Product name Required options, conditions, etc.


Heater Kit-M2 Heater Kit-M2 is required when installing the optional heater.
Handset-K1 -

10
1. Product Overview

Features

Product Feature
• Improved operation performance due to addition of the Touch Panel on the Control Panel Unit.
• FAX standard model is added as a Network model.
• Toner cartridge prior delivery alarm function is quipped.
• Wi-Fi is equipped as standard to offer a mobile print environment (Standard models only).

11
1. Product Overview

Specifications

Product Specifications
Item Description
Copyboard Stream reading, original fixed reading
Installation method Desktop
Light source type LED(RGB)
Photosensitive medium OPC drum (30 mm dia)
Image reading method CIS
Reproduction method Indirect electrostatic method
Exposure method Laser exposure system
Charging method Roller charge
Development method Dry single component projection developing
Transfer method By transfer roller
Separation method Curvature and static eliminator
Pickup method 1st cassette: Pad separation method
2nd cassette: Retard separation method
Multi-purpose tray: Pad separation method
Fixing method On demand
Delivery method Face down delivery (in-body delivery)
Reproduction ratio 25 to 400%
Drum cleaning method By cleaning blade
Toner type Single component magnetic negative charge toner
Toner replenish method Toner cartridge
Toner level detection function Yes
Top image margin 3.0 +/- 1.5 mm
Left image margin 3.0 +/- 2.0 mm
Warm-up time At power ON: 13 sec or less
Number of gradations 256 gradations
Reading resolution 600 × 600dpi
Writing resolution 600 × 600dpi
First copy time A4: 7.4sec or less, LTR: 7.5sec or less
First print time 8.6 sec or less
Paper type (Cassette 1) Plain paper (64 to 90g/m2), recycled paper (64 to 80g/m2), color paper(64 to 80g/m2), pre-
punched paper (75to80g/m2)
Paper type Plain paper (64 to 90g/m2), recycled paper (64 to 80g/m2), color paper(64 to 80g/m2), pre-
(Multi-purpose tray) punched paper (75 to 80g/m2), bond paper(75 to 90g/m2), heavy paper (91 to 105g/m2),
heavy paper 2 (106 to 128g/m2), Transparency, labels, Envelopes(No.10 (COM10), Mon-
arch, ISO-C5, DL)
Paper size (Cassette 1) A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11 x 17, LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMTR, OFFICIO, Ecuador-
OFFICIO, Brazil-OFFICIO, Mexico-OFFICIO, Argentina-OFFICIO, A-LTR, A-LTRR, GLTR,
GLTR-R, GLGL, AUS-FOOLSCAP, FOOLSCAP, 8K, 16K, 16KR, F4A, India-LGL
Paper size (Cassette 2) A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11 x 17, LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, 8K, 16K, 16KR
Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 11 x 17, LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, STMTR, EXEC,
(Multi-purpose tray) OFFICIO, Ecuador-OFFICIO, Brazil-OFFICIO, Mexico-OFFICIO, Argentina-OFFICIO, A-
LTR, A-LTRR, GLTR, GLTR-R, GLGL, AUS-FOOLSCAP, FOOLSCAP, 8K, 16K, 16KR,
F4A, India-LGL, Custom paper size (95 x 148mm to 297 x 431.8mm), Envelopes(No.10
(COM10), Monarch, ISO-C5, DL)
Pickup capacity Cassette1/2: 250 sheets (80g/m2)
Multi-purpose tray(80g/m2):
50 sheets(A3, B4, 11x17, LGL)
80 sheets(A4, A4R, B5R, B5, A5, A5R, LTR, LTRR, STMT, STMTR)
Duplex method Through path duplex
Environment temperature range See "Checking the Installation Environment."
Environment humidity range See "Checking the Installation Environment."

12
1. Product Overview

Item Description
Noise imageRUNNER 2204:
At the time of printing: 66.7 dB or less / At the time of standby: 48 dB or less
imageRUNNER 2004:
At the time of printing: 66 dB or less / At the time of standby: 48 dB or less
Ozone 1.5mg/h or smaller

Power Supply Specifications


Item Description
Power supply rating Network model
120 - 127 V AC, 60Hz, 4.6 A
220 - 240 V AC, 50Hz/60Hz, 2.7 A
Local print model
220 - 240 V AC, 50Hz/60Hz, 2.4 A
Power consump- Maximum power consumption 1.5 kW or less
tion At the time of sleep (Deep Sleep) 2.0 W or less

Weight and Size


Item Description
Dimensions (W x D x H) 622 mm × 589mm × 502 mm (with the platen cover and single cassette)
622 mm × 589mm × 605mm (with the feeder and single cassette)
Weight Min (With the platen cover and single cassette: 28.7 kg (included with the drum unit and toner cartridge)
Max (with the feeder, double cassette, duplex and FAX): 42.5 kg (included with the drum unit and toner
cartridge)

FAX Specifications
Item Description Remarks
Applicable line Public Switched Telephone Network -
Communication Super G3
-
Protocol
Modem speed 33.6kbps -
Data compres- MH, MR, MMR
-
sion method
Pickup position Cassette 1, Cassette 2, Multi-purpose Tray Set in User Mode
Dial method One-touch dial : 4
Abbreviation dial : 100
Group dial : 50
Address book dial
-
Normal dial : entry by numeric keypad
Auto redial
Manual redial
Concurrent transmission : 114
Reception meth- Auto reception
-
od Remote reception by a telephone
Report output TX Report
Communication Management Report
-
(to be output automatically for every 40 communications)
RX Report

13
1. Product Overview

Productivity (Print Speed)


Product name Print Speed
imageRUNNER 2204 series A4 22 sheet/minute
A4R 11 sheet/minute
A3 11 sheet/minute
A5R 13 sheet/minute
11 x 17 11 sheet/minute
LGL 10 sheet/minute
LTR 22 sheet/minute
imageRUNNER 2004 series A4 20 sheet/minute
A4R 11 sheet/minute
A3 10 sheet/minute
A5R 13 sheet/minute
11 x 17 10 sheet/minute
LGL 10 sheet/minute
LTR 20 sheet/minute

* Except when paper is fed from the Multi-Purpose Tray.


The copy speed may vary, depending on the settings for paper type, paper size, and the sending method. When continuously
copying, adjustments for machine temperature or image quality may cause machine operations to pause or become slow.

Paper Type
See the table below for the custom paper size.

Type Feeding direction (mm) Width direction (mm)


Custom paper size 148 to 431.8 95 to 297

■ Pickup
Usable paper types are shown.

Paper type (g/m2) Size Multi-pur- Cassette 1 Cassette 2


pose tray
• plain paper (64 to 90) A3 Yes Yes Yes
• Color paper (64 to 80) B4 Yes Yes Yes
• recycled paper (64 to 80)
A4R Yes Yes Yes
A4 Yes Yes Yes
B5R Yes Yes Yes
B5 Yes Yes Yes
A5 Yes No Yes
A5R Yes Yes No
11 x 17 Yes Yes Yes
LGL Yes Yes Yes
LTR Yes Yes Yes
LTRR Yes Yes Yes
STMTR Yes Yes No
STMT Yes No Yes
EXEC Yes No No
OFFICIO Yes Yes No
Ecuador-OFFICIO Yes Yes No
Brazil-OFFICIO Yes Yes No
Mexico-OFFICIO Yes Yes No
Argentina-OFFICIO Yes Yes No
A-LTR Yes Yes No
A-LTRR Yes Yes No
GLTR Yes Yes No

14
1. Product Overview

Paper type (g/m2) Size Multi-pur- Cassette 1 Cassette 2


pose tray
• plain paper (64 to 90) GLTR-R Yes Yes No
• Color paper (64 to 80) GLGL Yes Yes No
• recycled paper (64 to 80)
AUS-FOOLSCAP Yes Yes No
FOOLSCAP Yes Yes No
8K Yes Yes Yes
16KR Yes Yes Yes
16K Yes Yes Yes
F4A Yes Yes No
India-LGL Yes Yes No
Custom paper size Yes No No
• Heavy paper 1 (91 to105) A3 Yes No No
• Heavy paper 2 (106 to 128) B4 Yes No No
• Bond paper (75 to 90)
A4R Yes No No
A4 Yes No No
B5R Yes No No
B5 Yes No No
A5 Yes No No
A5R Yes No No
11 x 17 Yes No No
LGL Yes No No
LTR Yes No No
LTRR Yes No No
STMTR Yes No No
STMT Yes No No
EXEC Yes No No
8K Yes No No
16KR Yes No No
16K Yes No No
Custom paper size Yes No No
• Label A4R Yes No No
A4 Yes No No
LTR Yes No No
• Pre-punched paper A4R Yes Yes Yes
A4 Yes Yes Yes
LTR Yes Yes Yes
LTRR Yes Yes Yes
• Transparency A4 Yes No No
LTR Yes No No
• Envelope No.10 (COM10) Yes No No
Monarch Yes No No
ISO-C5 Yes No No
DL Yes No No

15
1. Product Overview

Name of Parts

External View
■ Network model
[8]

[9] [7]

[10]

[6]

[11]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

[12]

[13]

[16]
[15]

[17]

[14]

No. Name No. Name


[1] Reader front cover [10] Left cover unit
[2] Left front cover [11] Multi-purpose tray
[3] Front cover [12] Reader rear cover
[4] Cassette 1 [13] Rear rover
[5] Cassette 2 [14] Right cover
[6] Control panel [15] USB Port
[7] Delivery tray cover [16] LAN Port
[8] Reader upper unit [17] Telephone line jack
[9] Platen glass

16
1. Product Overview

■ Local print model


[7]

[8] [6]

[9]

[5]

[10]

[1] [2] [3] [4]

[11]

[12]
[14]

[13]

No. Name No. Name


[1] Reader front cover [8] Platen glass
[2] Left front cover [9] Left cover unit
[3] Front cover [10] Multi-purpose tray
[4] Cassette 1 [11] Reader rear cover
[5] Control panel [12] Rear rover
[6] Delivery tray cover [13] Right cover
[7] Reader upper unit [14] USB Port

17
1. Product Overview

Cross Sectional View


[1]

[17]

[16]

[15]
[2]
[14]

[13] [3]
[12] [4]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]

[6]

[5]

No. Name Remarks


[1] CIS unit -
[2] Laser scanner unit -
[3] Toner cartridge -
[4] Developing assembly -
[5] Cassette 2 pickup roller If equipped with the 1-cassette module.
[6] Cassette 2 separation roller If equipped with the 1-cassette module.
[7] Cassette 2 feed roller If equipped with the 1-cassette module.
[8] Cassette 1 separation pad -
[9] Cassette 1 pickup roller -
[10] Multi-purpose tray separation pad -
[11] Multi-purpose tray pickup roller -
[12] Registration roller -
[13] Transfer roller -
[14] Drum unit -
[15] Fixing assembly -
[16] Duplex unit If equipped with the duplex unit.
[17] Delivery roller -

18
1. Product Overview

Operation

Power Switch
■ Types of power switch

Heater Switch

Energy Saver Key

Main Power Switch

This machine has the Main Power Switch, the Heater Switch and the Energy Saver Key.
1. Main Power Switch
This switch is used to turn OFF / ON the power of host machine.
2. Heater Switch (option)
This switch is used to turn OFF / ON the power of the cassette heater.
3. Energy Saver Key
This switch is used to shift the machine to power-save mode or to restore it to normal mode.

■ Points to Note on Turning ON/OFF the Power Switch


• To turn off the power, turn off the Main power Switch.
• After power-off (After the Main power Switch is turned off), do not reactivate the Main power Switch until a screen disappears.
• Do not turn off the power while download is processing.

19
1. Product Overview

Control Panel
■ Network model
[1] [2] [6] [5] [4] [3] [8] [7] [9][11] [12][13]

[16] [10] [17] [18] [19] [14] [15]

No. Name Function


[1] Home key Press to back the home screen.
[2] Back key Press to return to the previous screen.
[3] Status Monitor key Press to view the status of print, copy, scan or report output.
[4] Paper Setting key Press to select the paper source.
[5] ID Card Copy key Press to use the 2-sided copy of ID Card.
[6] Reset key Press to reset the settings.
[7] Numeric key Press to enter characters and numbers.
[8] Tone key Press to send the tone signal from the dial pulse.
[9] Symbols key Press to enter symbols.
[10] ID key Press to log in/out when Department ID Management has been set.
[11] Clear key Press to clear the number such as copy count or characters.
[12] Energy Saver key Press to manually set or cancel the Sleep mode.
[13] Counter Check key Press this to display the total number of copies or prints (performed by the machine) on the
display.
[14] Start key Press to start a job.
[15] Stop key Press to cancel jobs.
[16] Touch Panel During normal operation, displays messages and prompts. When adjusting the settings,
displays your selections, text, and numbers.
[17] Processing/Dara LED* Flashes to show the status of jobs.
When the LED is OFF: there is no job.
When the LED is ON(green): there is a job waiting to be processed.
When the LED is blinking(green): the device is in operation.
[18] Wi-Fi LED Flashes to show the status of Wi-Fi.
When the LED is OFF: there is no Wi-Fi connection.
When the LED is ON(blue): there is a Wi-Fi connection.
When the LED is blinking(blue): the device is in operation to connect.
[19] Error LED* Flashes to show the status of error.
When the LED is OFF: there is no error.
When the LED is ON(red): there is a service call error.
When the LED is blinking(red): there is other error.

* When the case of LED ON condition and LED blinking condition is occurred together, the LED turns ON.

20
1. Product Overview

■ Local print model


[1] [2] [6] [5] [4] [3] [12][13]

[16] [17] [19] [14] [15]

No. Name Function


[1] Home key Press to back the home screen.
[2] Back key Press to return to the previous screen.
[3] Status Monitor key Press to view the status of print, copy, scan or report output.
[4] Paper Setting key Press to select the paper source.
[5] ID Card Copy key Press to use the 2-sided copy of ID Card.
[6] Reset key Press to reset the settings.
[12] Energy Saver key Press to manually set or cancel the Sleep mode.
[13] Counter Check key Press this to display the total number of copies or prints (performed by the machine) on the
display.
[14] Start key Press to start a job.
[15] Stop key Press to cancel jobs.
[16] Touch Panel During normal operation, displays messages and prompts. When adjusting the settings,
displays your selections, text, and numbers.
[17] Processing/Dara LED* Flashes to show the status of jobs.
When the LED is OFF: there is no job.
When the LED is ON(green): there is a job waiting to be processed.
When the LED is blinking(green): the device is in operation.
[19] Error LED* Flashes to show the status of error.
When the LED is OFF: there is no error.
When the LED is ON(red): there is a service call error.
When the LED is blinking(red): there is other error.

* When the case of LED ON condition and LED blinking condition is occurred together, the LED turns ON.

21
2 Technical
Explanation
Basic Configuration............................. 23
Original Exposure System...................24
Controller System................................34
Laser Exposure System...................... 39
Image Formation System.................... 44
Fixing System......................................52
Pickup/Feed System........................... 61
Monitoring Function (e-Maintenance/
imageWARE Remote)..................... 72
2. Technical Explanation

Basic Configuration

Functional Configuration
The host machine is constructed by following functional system blocks; Document Exposure System, Controller System, Laser
Exposure System, Image Formation System, Fixing System and Pickup/Feed System.

Original exposure system

CIS unit

Controller system
Delivery
Fixing Controller system
system ࣭Engine control
Duplexing ࣭System control
feed Fixing
Laser exposure system

Transfer Laser scanner unit

Image
formation
Pickup system

Cassette 1
Pickup/feed
system
Cassette 2
Paper flow
Signal flow
Laser beam

Basic Sequence
■ Overview
Each sequence, from main power switch ON until the main motor stops, is described as below.

Zone Purpose Remarks


WAIT From main power switch ON until Check and delivery the , remaining While this zone, it keeps
(wait) the main motor stops initial rotat- paper, check the tonner and drum heater temperature con-
ing. unit, detect the cover open, drive the stant.
Main Motor and control the High
Voltage Power(HTV) to be standby.
STBY From WAIT end or LSTR end un- Keeps the host machine standby.
(standby) til print indication command is en- -
tered from the Controller PCB.
INTR From print indication command is Drive the Main Motor, Laser Scan-
(initial rotation) entered from the Controller PCB ner Unit, Fixing Unit and Pickup/ -
until the Transfer Bias turns ON. Feed System to prepare for print.
PRINT From INTR end until Delivery Forms image on the photosensitive
(print) Sensor detects end edge of the drum, based on Video signal (/
paper VDO1,/VDO2,VDO1,VDO2) from -
the Controller PCB. It transfers toner
image onto the paper.
LSTR From PRINT end until the main Eliminates the paper on the final job From print indication com-
(last rotation) motor stops. completely and prepare for next mand is entered from the
print. Controller PCB until the
Transfer Bias turns ON.

23
2. Technical Explanation

Original Exposure System

Overview
■ Specifications/controls/functions
The main specifications, controls and functions of the original exposure and feed system are described below.

Item Specification/Function
Original exposure LED
Original scan In book mode mobile CIS scanning
In ADF mode fixed CIS scanning
Read resolution B/W: 600 dpi (main scanning) x 600 dpi (sub scanning)
Color: 300 dpi (main scanning) x 600 dpi (sub scanning)
Gradation 256 gradation
Carriage position detection Contact Sensor HP Sensor (SR402)
Magnification 25% to 400%
Main scanning direction Image is processed on the Controller PCB
Sub scanning direction In book mode: Image is procesed by carriage speed and Controller PCB *1
In ADF mode: Image is processed by paper delivery speed and Controller PCB *1
Lens Rod lens array
CMOS sensor Number of lines:1
Number of pixels: Total 7344 (incl. 7276 effective pixels)
Maximum original scan width: 308mm
CIS drive control Reader Motor (M301)
Original size detection In book mode No
In ADF mode Main scanning direction: photo interrupter
Sub scanning direction: photo interrup

*1: Controls differ depending on magnifications. Refer to Magnification Change for detail.

■ Major Components
Major components of the original exposure system is shows below.

Contact sensor HP sensor


(SR402)

Reader motor
(M301)
CIS unit

Item No. Specification/Function


Reader Motor M301 Pulse Motor: carriage drive control
Contact Sensor HP Sensor SR402 Photo interrupter: CIS home position detection

24
2. Technical Explanation

Item No. Specification/Function


CIS unit - LED Indirect exposure

■ Basic Sequence
● Basic Sequence at Power-On
Main power switch
ON

SREADY STBY
Reader motor
(M301)

LED

Contact Sensor
HP Sensor(SR402)

Shading Shading
position position

: Forward movement
: Backward movement

Contact Sensor HP Sensor


(SR402)

Shading Leading
HP position edge

CIS position check

25
2. Technical Explanation

● Basic Sequence at Start Key ON (book mode/1 original)


Black shading/White shading
Start key
ON

STBY SCFW SCRW STBY


Reader motor
(M301)
LED

Contact Sensor
HP Sensor(SR402)

Shading Leading edge Trailing edge Shading


position position

: Forward movement
: Backward movement

Contact sensor HP sensor

Original glass reading Shading


start position HP position Leading edge Trailing edge

1. It moves to the start position


after black shading/white shading.

2. Original scan

3. Moves to the standby position

● Basic Sequence at Start Key ON (ADF mode/1 original)


Black shading/White shading
Start key
ON

STBY SCFW SCRW STBY


Reader motor
(M301)
LED

Contact Sensor
HP Sensor(SR402)

Shading Leading edge Trailing edge Shading


position position

: Forward movement
: Backward movement

26
2. Technical Explanation

Contact sensor HP sensor

DADF stream read Original glass reading Shading


start position start position position
HP

Black shading
White shading
Original scan

Controls
■ Controlling the Scanning Drive System
● Scanning Drive System Configuration
The scanner drive system parts are described below.

Carriage drive belt

Contact sensor HP sensor


(SR402)

Guide shaft

Forward
movement

CIS
Backward
movement
Reader motor
(M301)

Carriage

• Reader motor (M301) drive signal


Controls the reader motor rotation, stop, rotational direction and speed.
• Contact sensor hp sensor (SR402)
Detects that the Contact sensor hp sensor is positioned at the home position.

● Reader Motor (M301) Control


Reader motor (M301) controls rotation, stop, rotational direction and speed by signal from Controller PCB (PCB1)

27
2. Technical Explanation

Controller PCB

4 3 2 1 J11

A- A+ B+ B-
4 3 2 1

M301

NOTE:
The scanning speed for each mode is as follows.
• Copy (100%) : 123 mm/sec
• Color scan(300dpi x 600dpi) : 61.5 mm/sec

1. CIS forward movement during image scan


CIS unit is controlled by following motor sequence during image scan.

Start Leading Trailing


position edge edge Stop

Acceleration Constant speed Deceleration

Movement
speed

[1] [2] [3] [4]

Movement distance
[1] Acceleration area: The motor accelerates to the speed specified for each mode.
[2] Runup area: A margin to stabilize the speed.
[3] Image read area: The image is read at a constant speed.
[4] Deceleration area: Upon detection of the trailing edge, the motor decelerates rapidly and stops.

2. CIS backward movement after image scan


After image scan, CIS backward movement keeps 123mm/sec until CIS shading position.

■ CIS (contact image sensor)


● Outline
CIS functions original exposure and reading. Image is read on line-by-line basis.

28
2. Technical Explanation

Light guide

Original glass

Rod lens array

Scan direction

LED (R/G/B)

Light guide LED

Rod lens array


Original glass

Item Function
LED The light what it illuminates original.
Light guide LED light illuminates the entire image line.
Rod lens array Collects the light reflected from the original.

● Analog Control Performed by CIS


CIS functions analog image processing as follows.
1. The light reflected by the original is formed by rod lens array.
2. The light is received by CMOS sensor array.
3. CMOS sensor array converts the received light to electric signal and outputs it.
CMOS sensor array consists of 6 channels (units). Each channel is provided with output correction table. The array outputs the
gained image from the brightness signal.
1
s

2
l
xe
pi
44
73

3
4

CMOS sensor channel㹶6


5
6

29
2. Technical Explanation

■ Magnification Change
● Magnification Change in Main Scanning Direction
• In book mode or ADF mode
In main scanning direction, image is read at 100% size. Magnification is changed by processing data on the Controller PCB
(PCB1).

● Magnification Change in Sub Main Scanning Direction


Magnification change in sub scanning direction is functioned by magnification rate as follows.
1. From 25 to 199% reduction and enlargement
Reading and sending data speed keep 123mm/sec in book mode and ADF mode.
2. From 200 to 400% enlargement
Reading and sending data speed keep 61.5mm/sec in book mode and ADF mode.

■ Dust Detection
● Outline
Dust detection changes the original read position or corrects the read image by dust on the stream reading glass or the ADF
platen roller, thus preventing dust image from the output.
This control is performed only when the ADF is equipped and closed.
[Control Timing]
• At the job end
• Immediately before scanning (one sheet at a time)

Main power
switch Start key
ON ON

WMUPR STBY
1st 2nd
SCAN SCAN

Dust detection Dust detection Dust detection


control control control

[Description of Control]
• At job end
CIS detects dust by reflected light from the surface of the ADF platen roller at the read position. After job completion, dust
detection is performed at A, B and C whether dust is detected or not.
1. Dust detection is performed once at A.
2. CIS moves to B and dust detection is performed once at B.
3. CIS moves to C and dust detection is performed once at C.
4. 1. CIS moves to alphabetical order of A, B and C and dust detection is performed at any one of clean part and reads
original.
2. CIS moves to A and reads original when it detects dust at all position: A, B and C.

30
2. Technical Explanation

A B C

• Immediately before scanning (one sheet at a time)


CIS does not move to detect dust. The original is read at the position controlled by job end or start. Read image is corrected
when dust is detected.

Point Description
A Read reference position (2.5mm left side from the center of Platen roller (parts of ADF))
B 0.5 mm to the inside of the roller from the reference position
C 1.0 mm to the inside of the roller from the reference position

■ Image Processing
● Outline
Major specifications and functions of the image processing system are as follows.

1. CMOS sensor
• Number of lines: 1
• Number of pixels: Total 7344 (incl. 7276 effective pixels)
2. Shading correction
• Shading correction: performed for each job.
• Shading adjustment: performed on the Service mode.

CIS㸦Contact image
sensor㸧 Controller PCB
Analog image processor Digital image processor
CMOS
sensor Analog
A/D Shading
image
conversion processing
processing

Functions of the image processing system are summarized below.


1. Controller PCB (PCB1)
• CMOS sensor drive, analog image processing, A/D conversion, and shading correction
The Controller PCB (PCB1) is used to process images on a line-by-line basis. The major functions are as follows.
1. Analog image processing
• CMOS sensor drive
• CMOS sensor output gain correction and offset correction
• CMOS sensor output A/D conversion
2. Digital image processing
• Shading correction

31
2. Technical Explanation

CIS㸦Contact image sensor)

CMOS sensor (1 line)

Controller PCB
Analog image signal

CMOS sensor
drive control SRAM

Analog image
processing Shading correction
Digital
A/D
image
- Gain correction conversion
signal CPU
- Offset correction

● CMOS Sensor Drive


The CMOS sensor consists of 7344 photocells with 1-line linear image sensor on the host machine. Photoelectric conversion
signal outputs to the Controller PCB (PCB1) in parallel for each channel (total 6 channels) of the CMOS sensor array.

CMOS sensor 6 CMOS sensor 3 CMOS sensor 1

Light receiving block

output
L L H H L H L H H H L ………

● CMOS Sensor Output Gain Correction and Offset Correction


The analog video signal output gain from the CMOS sensor is maintained constant (gain correction). Also, the output voltage is
maintained constant (offset correction) in case that incident light is not entered.

● CMOS Sensor Output A/D Conversion


The analog video signal after the correction is converted to digital signals corresponding to individual pixel voltage levels by A/D
converter.

● Shading Correction
The CMOS sensor output is not necessarily for uniform as following reasons even when the density of the original is uniform.
1. Variation in sensitivity among CMOS sensor pixels
2. Variation in light intensity of rod lens array
Shading correction is performed to even the CMOS sensor output on the service mode or each job.

Shading Adjustment
Shading Adjustmen measures the density of the standard white plate, and stores the measured density data. The stored data is
processed to target value for shading correction.

Shading Correction
Shading correction is performed each scan. Shading correction value is set by the differences between the measured density of
the standard white plate and the targeted value stored on the shading correction circuit. The shading value corrects the variation
among CMOS sensor pixels for scan, thus the image density level is equalized.

32
2. Technical Explanation

CMOS Characteristics
sensor after correction
output
Characteristics
Target value
before correction
Measurement
value

White
Original density
Standard white plate

33
2. Technical Explanation

Controller System

Overview
■ Functional Configuration
Adoption of the new controller has realized the engine control and system control in one board.

Item Details
Controller PCB Engine control / System control / memory control / printer unit output image processing control / reader
unit input image processing
   ROM 32MB
Settings data / Boot loaderROM / Main Program / Download Program / RUI
RAM Network model : 512MB
Local print model : 128MB
FRAM 8KB
USB port USB2.0 device I/F
Ethernet port Ethernet I/F
Lithium battery For the electricity backup of the clock
Life: approx. 10 years

● Main controller PCB

J711
J3 J4 J352 J715 J706

J716
J353 J717
J357 J709
J2 J1000 J354

J356 J710

J5
J351 J703 J708 J713
J701

J355 J705
J707
J712
J704
J1001

J714
J15 J14 J719 J1/J11 J1002

Jack No. Function Jack No. Function


J1/11 Power Supply PCB J705 Multi-purpose Tray Feed Clutch/Multi-purpose Tray Pickup
Solenoid/Fixing Cooling Fan/Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sen-
sor/Arch Sensor
J2 LAN J706 Fixing Pressure Release Sensor/Waste Toner Full Sensor
J3 Control Panel J707 Pre-registration Sensor
J4 Wi-Fi PCB J708 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor/Large Sensor
J5 USB device I/F J709 Fixing Main Thermistor/Fixing Sub Thermistor/Fixing Delivery
Sensor
J14 Counter PCB J710 Fixing Motor/Main Motor
J15 SOFT-ID J711 Polygon Motor
J351 ADF driver PCB (Actuator) J712 1-Cassette Controller PCB
J352 CIS J713 Duplex PCB
J353 Copyboard Cover open/closed Sensor J714 HVT PCB
J354 Contact Sensor HP Sensor J715 Laser Scanner Unit
J355 ADF driver PCB (Sensor) J716 Delivery Sensor
J356 Reader Motor J717 Delivery Full Sensor

34
2. Technical Explanation

Jack No. Function Jack No. Function


J357 ADF driver PCB (Power Supply) J719 Heater PCB
J701 Environment Sensor J1000/J1002 FAX PCB
J703 Power Supply PCB J1001 Speaker (FAX)
J704 Cassette 1 Pickup Solenoid/Cassette 2
Pickup Solenoid/Registration Clutch

Controls
■ Boot Sequence
• Starting Bootloader
• Starting Main Program
Turn ON the
Main Power Switch

Standby Display

NOTE:
After the startup of the main program, the screen of the progress bar is displayed.

■ Soft Counter
Count-up timing differs depending on the following conditions:Print mode (1-sided/ 2nd side of 2-sided/ 1st side of 2-sided)

Delivery position Print Mode


1-sided/ 2nd side of 2-sided 1st side of 2-sided
Count-up timing
Host Machine Fixing Delivery Sensor(SR201) Duplex Feed Sensor(SR503)

Target Display code of each counter (in service mode)/Item Country code
Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6
Taiwan Total1 Total(Large) Copy (Total1) Copy(Large) *1 *1 TAIWAN
101 103 201 203 000 000
LTN(120V) areal Total1 Total(Large) Copy (Total1 ) Copy(Large) *1 *1 USA
(Saudi Ara- 101 103 201 203 000 000 Canada
bia)type1 CLA
LTN(120V area) Total2 Copy (Total2) *1 *1 *1 *1 USA
(Saudi Arabia) 102 202 000 000 000 000 Canada
type2 CLA

35
2. Technical Explanation

Target Display code of each counter (in service mode)/Item Country code
Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6
Asia LTN(230V Total1 Total(Large) Copy (Total1) Copy(Large) *1 *1 SINGAPORE
area) Korea Chi- 101 103 201 203 000 000 KOREA CHINA
na
UK type1 Total (Large) Total (Small) Scan (Total 1) Print (Total1) *1 *1 EUROPE 1
112 113 501 301 000 000
UK type2 Total1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 EUROPE 1
101 000 000 000 000 000
Australia New- Total1 Total(Large) Copy (Total1) Copy(Large) *1 *1 AUSTRALIA
zealand 101 103 201 203 000 000

*1. by default, not indicated; may be changed in service mode.


In all acts, as for the contents of Counter1, even as for the service mode, impossible a change (It fix the count object).
COUNTER 2 to 6 can be changed from the service mode (COPIER > OPTION > USER > CNT-SW).
0: Conventional method(type1)(Default)
1: New method(type2)
2: New method(type3)
3: New method(type4)

■ Fan
● Fan layout

FM1

No. Name Function Error code


FM1 Fixing cooling fan Cools the fixing assembly. E805-0000

● Fan control
When the detection temperature of the environmental sensor is lower than 27 deg C

36
2. Technical Explanation

WUP STBY INI PTINT LSTR JAM/ Deep Sleep 1


ERR Sleep
Fixing cooling fan
(FM1)
Rotation *1

*1: The control sequence is different by the detection temperature of the environmental sensor.
The fan is driven for maximum 300 seconds after a fixing motor stopped.
When the left cover was opened, the fan stops.

■ Power Supply Control


● Energy Saving Function
Service Error
Power-on
Power OFF
Power-saving
Power-off
Service Error
Power ON Power OFF

No service error has occurred.


Stand by [4]
Control [1]
Panel Sleep 2
Reader [1] [2]

[1] Sleep 1
Automatic transition
[1] [3] depending on the condition

Engine
Controller

[1] Press [Power-saving] key. [2] Time to shift to a sleep mode passed.
[3] Print Job [4] An automatic shut down timer

Condition Description
Stand by It is a mode from which operation can be started immediately and in which all the power is supplied.
Sleep 1 Although the power is supplied to the controller, no power is supplied to the engine, reader and Control Panel.
Sleep 2 The CPU of the controller is in the power-saving status, and no power is supplied to the engine, reader and
Control Panel.
Service error State in which error code is displayed.
Power status does not shift to another one until the service error is canceled.

37
2. Technical Explanation

● Internal Power Supply

FAX PCB Wi-Fi


PCB

+3.3V

+3.3V
+24V
+3.3V +3.3V
ADF driver PCB +24V +5V Duplex PCB
+24V
+3.3V
Control panel unit +5V

+24V 1-Cassette
+3.3V
Controller PCB controller PCB
CIS unit +24V

+3.3V +3.3V
Laser scanner +24V +24V
unit HVT PCB
+5V
+5V generation
Sensor +5V
circuit
+24V Motor
Main switch (SW1) Solenoid
Clutch
Fan
+3.3V
+24V

+3.3 generation
circuit
+24V generation
circuit
Power supply PCB

Heater
control circuit

Heater switch
+24V

(SW100)
Fixing heater

Left cover
Cassette heater switch (SW2)
Heater (for cassette 1)
PCB

Cassette heater
(for cassette 2) Option or standard

38
2. Technical Explanation

Laser Exposure System

Overview
■ Specifications/Controls/Functions
• Laser light

Item Description
The number of laser light 2
Output 5mW
Wave length 785nm - 800nm (Infrared laser)

• Scanner motor

Item Description
Motor type DC brushless motor
The number of rotation 18923.767rpm
Type of bearing Oil

• Polygon mirror

Item Description
The number of face 4

• Controls

Item Description
Laser lighting timing control Laser control signal
Synchronous control BD signal
Laser intensity control APC (Automatic Photocurrent Control)
Polygon motor control Polygon motor control signal
Laser shutter control Laser shutter control signal

■ Main Configuration Parts


Polygonal mirror

Laser unit

Anamorphic lens

Photoconductive drum

Name Function
Photoconductive drum Receives laser beam to form latent image.
Polygon mirror Scans laser beam on the photoconductive drum in main scan di-
rection.
Laser unit Emits laser beam and detects BD signal.

39
2. Technical Explanation

Name Function
Anamorphic lens Reflects laser beam into the BD detector.

■ Control System Configuration


The laser exposure system is controlled by Controller PCB and Laser unit.
• Laser control signal
• BD signal
• Automatic photocurrent control (APC)
• Polygon motor control signal

Controller PCB

IC702

J715 J711

Polygon motor control


Laser control signal
BD signal

Automatic photocurrent control


(APC)

Laser control signal Function


Laser control signal LASER_CNT0 A/B Laser control signal
LASER_CNT1 A/B Laser control signal
LASER_CNT2 A/B Laser control signal
BD signal /LASER_BDI BD signal
Polygon motor control signal LASER_FG FG output signal
/LASER_P_ACC Motor acceleration sign
/LASER_P_DEC Motor deceleration sign

Controls
■ Laser control signal
Laser ON/OFF is controlled by combination of laser control signal (LASER_CNT0/1/2). Controller PCB sends video signal
(VDO1, /VDO1, VDO2, /VDO2) and laser control signal (LASER_CNT0/1/2) to the laser unit. Laser Scanner Unit controls two
laser ON/OFF by combination of LASER_CNT0/1/2. Combination of the laser control signal (LASER_CNT0/1/2) is shown as
follows.

40
2. Technical Explanation

Laser control signal Laser status


(LASER_CNT)
2 1 0 A laser B laser Description
0 0 0 OFF OFF Laser control OFF
0 1 0 ON OFF APC_A control
0 0 1 OFF ON APC_B control
0 1 1 OFF OFF Forcible output OFF
1 0 0 ON ON Laser AB Forcible output
1 0 1 OFF ON Laser B Forcible output
1 1 0 ON OFF Laser A Forcible output
1 1 1 Allowed Video signal entry Laser emitting is possible following the video signal.

■ BD signal
BD signal are horizontal synchronous which the Controller PCB outputs image signal each scan and vertical synchronous which
the Controller PCB recognizes the top edge of the paper.
A printer starts sending BD signal when delivery paper reaches to specific point. The Controller PCB recognizes the beginning
of continuous BD signal as top edge of the paper, recognizes the end of continuous BD signal as end edge of the paper.

■ Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light


● APC
APC monitors the laser light that emits the built-in photo diode of the laser diode and adjusts it appropriate intensity.

■ Controlling the Polygon Motor


● Polygon Motor Control Signal
Polygon motor control signal controls the rotation speed by referring to the polygon motor rotation speed signal (FG signal)
between the polygon motor reaches target rotation number from start-up and image formation. It controls the polygon motor
rotation speed based on BD signal during image formation. Polygon motor rotation speed is controlled by speed-up signal (ACC
signal) and speed-down signal (DEC signal).

41
2. Technical Explanation

Controller PCB

IC702

J711

/LASER_P_ACC
/LASER_P_DEC
LASER_FG

■ Controlling the Laser Shutter /LASER_BDI

● Laser Shutter Control


When the drum unit is drawn, laser shutter which is linked to the drum unit, lift down and the laser light is blocked. Also, when
the front door or right door open is detected, polygon motor and the laser emission are turned OFF.

[2]

[3]

[1]

OPEN [2] CLOSE [2]

[1] [1]
[3]

42
2. Technical Explanation

No. Name
[1] Laser shutter
[2] Polygonal mirror
[3] Laser beam

43
2. Technical Explanation

Image Formation System

Overview
■ Specifications of Image Formation System
Item Specifications/Mechanism/Method
Photosensitive Material OPC drum
drum Drum diameter 30mm
Cleaning method Cleaning blade
Process speed 106.81mm/sec
Primary charging Charging method Primary charging roller (AC+DC)
Roller diameter 14mm
Transfer Transfer method Transfer roller
Roller diameter 16mm
Developing Developing method Dry one-component jumping development (AC+DC)
Toner Magnetic negative toner
Toner level detection Toner detection sensor (inside developing unit)
Developing cylinder diameter 20mm
Separation Separation method Static separation (Static eliminator) + Curvature separation
Toner waste container Drum unit

■ Major Components of Image Formation System


Major component parts in image formation system are shown below.

[2]
[3]

[1]

[4]

[5]
[10] [6]

[9]
[7]
[8]

No. Name Function


[1] Photosensitive Drum Forms image on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum.
[2] Cleaning Blade Removes residual toner on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum.
[3] Primary Charging Roller Charges negatively on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum while it rotates following
the Photosensitive Drum rotation.
[4] Drum Unit Consists of a Photosensitive Drum, a Primary Charging Roller, etc.
[5] Developing Blade Controls the amount of toner to uniform it on the Developing Cylinder.
[6] Developing Assembly Consists of a Developing Cylinder, a Developing Blade, etc.
[7] Toner Cartridge A toner cartridge for supply
[8] Developing Cylinder Transfers toner from the Developing Assembly to the Photosensitive Drum.

44
2. Technical Explanation

No. Name Function


[9] Transfer Roller Positively charges the back side of the paper to transfer toner from the Photosensitive
Drum to the paper.
[10] Static Eliminator Negatively charges the back side of the paper to separate the paper from the Photo-
sensitive Drum.

■ Image Formation Process


An image formation system consists of 6 blocks such as primary charging, laser exposure, developing, transfer, separation and
cleaning.

Drum cleaning Primary Charging Roller


block Cleaning blade

Photosensitive
Drum

Paper
Primary charging block
Separation
block
Static Eliminator

Laser exposure block

Developing
block
Transfer Roller
Transfer
block
Developing Cylinder

No. Image Formation Process Description


[1] Primary charging block Negative potential is formed on the surface of the photosensitive drum.
[2] Laser exposure block Latent image formation is formed on the photosensitive drum as charge neutralization
is proceeded by laser beam sweep.
[3] Developing block Visible image is formed as the negatively-charged toner on the developing cylinder is
adhered to the latent image formation on the surface of the photosensitive drum.
[4] Transfer block A toner on the photosensitive drum is transferred to the paper as positive charge is
applied to the back of it.
[5] Separation block A paper is easily separated from the photosensitive drum with its elastic force while
negative charge is applied to the back of the paper.
[6] Drum cleaning block A cleaning blade scrapes a residual toner on the surface of the photosensitive drum and
it feeds the waste toner to the drum unit.

■ Basic Sequence
Basic sequence for printing is as follows.

45
2. Technical Explanation

Main power switch ON Print command received

WAIT STBY INTR PRINT LSTR


1 Main Motor(M202)
2 Polygon Motor(M203)

3 Laser

4 Pre-registration Sensor(SR207)
5 Delivery Sensor(SR203)

6 Registration Clutch(CL203)

7 Primary Charging AC Bias


8 Primary Charging DC Bias

9 Developing AC Bias
10 Developing DC Bias

11 Transfer Bias *1 *1

12 Separation Static Eliminator Bias

*1: Cleaning Bias

Controls
■ Drum Unit
A Drum Unit mainly consists of a Photosensitive Drum, a Primary Charging Roller, a Cleaning Blade. It is driven by Main Motor
(M202). The Cleaning Blade is in contact with the surface of the Photosensitive Drum to remove residual toner which is leftover
of the transfer from the surface of the Photosensitive Drum to the paper.

Primary charging roller

Cleaning blade

Photosensitive drum

M202

[1]

Controller PCB

No. Name
[1] Main motor drive signal

● Primary Charging Bias Control


Primary charging system is direct charging by charging roller. AC bias is applied to the primary charging roller to provide constant
charging apart from DC bias.

46
2. Technical Explanation

Primary charging roller


Photosensitive drum

HVT PCB

Environment sensor

[1] [2]

Primary DC bias Primary AC bias


control circuit control circuit
Controller PCB

No. Name
[1] Primary charging bias control signal
[2] Environment sensor detection signal

● AC bias switch control


AC bias changes output value according to the environment detected on the environment sensor (HU1).

● Detection of drum (presence)


To detect if the drum unit is installed or not

Execution timing
• When the Primary charging bias is turned ON.
• When the Developing bias is turned ON.

Detection description
t is determined by the current monitor signal of the primary charging AC bias or Toner level detection signal at discharge current
control.
• In case that current monitor value is less than the specified value (2.0V) or Toner level detection signal value is less than
the specified value (2.5V): no Drum Unit.
• In case that current monitor value is the specified value (2.0V) or more or Toner level detection signal value is the specified
value (2.5V) or more: Drum Unit present

Operation of the main unit


Operation of the main unit is stopped while “Insert the drum unit.” is shown on the control panel.

Primary charging roller

Primary charging AC
Current monitor signal HVT
PCB Controller PCB
Toner level detection signal

Antenna sensor

47
2. Technical Explanation

■ Developing Assembly
A Developing Assembly mainly consists of a Developing Cylinder, a Developing Blade, and a Toner Stirring Plate. It is driven by
main motor (M202) and registration clutch (CL203). Toner level in the developing assembly is detected by antenna sensor.

Developing assembly

Stirring plate

Developing cylinder

Developing blade Antenna rod


CL203

M202

[2] [1]

Controller PCB

No. Name
[1] Registration clutch drive signal
[2] Main motor drive signal

● Developing Bias Control


DC bias and AC bias are applied to the Developing Cylinder.

Photosensitive drum

Environment sensor

Developing cylinder
HVT PCB

[1] [2]

Developing DC bias Developing AC bias


control circuit control circuit
Controller PCB

48
2. Technical Explanation

No. Name
[1] Developing bias control signal
[2] Environment sensor detection signal

● DC bias switch control


DC bias changes output value of DC bias according to the environment and density setting detected on the Environment Sensor
(HU1).

● Toner Level Detection


Toner level detection performs at warm up rotation and at print for AC bias application. It detects toner level by difference between
reference signal (/HTV_AN_TNRCHKD) from the developing bias detection circuit and toner level detection signal (/HTV_AN_
TNRCHKT).

Antenna sensor
Toner cartridge

Developing assembly

Toner cartridge prior delivery alarm Display Remaining Toner er- Empty toner
ror
Toner level Default: XX %*1
5 to 1 % 0%
(Toner cartridge) The value can be changed in service mode
Detection Timing Detected lower than specified voltage between reference signal
Predicted from the toner supply count
and toner level detection signal.
Detected to Toner supply count Antenna sensor
Message Prepare the toner cartridge. Insert new toner cartridge.
None
(Continuous printing is enabled.) (Host machine is stopped.)
Alarm Code 10-0020 None

Toner Level is displayed on User Interface at unit of 10% predicted from the toner supply count.
*1: The default differs depending on the country.
*2:COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > T-DLV-BK

● Detection of Completion of Toner Replacement


Detection of Completion of Toner Replacement *1*2
Detection timing When a replacement of Toner Container is detected
Detected to (location) Antenna sensor
Alarm code 10-0100
Remarks The toner supply count is reset at the same time.

*1 Since the Toner Cartridge does not have memory, an alarm of Completion of Toner Replacement is not generated when the
Toner Cartridge is replaced before it gets used up.
*2 Alarm of Completion of Toner Replacement is not generated by replacing the Toner Cartridge in the following conditions and
timing.
• The Controller PCB was replaced with the power OFF and then a new Toner Cartridge was installed before the power was
turned ON.
• The Controller PCB was replaced with the power OFF, and then the power was turned ON and a new Toner Cartridge was
installed with the Toner Cartridge removed or with the Front cover open.

49
2. Technical Explanation

■ Toner Cartridge
A toner cartridge is charged with single component magnetic negative charge toner. The toner is delivered from the toner supply
port to the developing assembly as stirring rod in the toner cartridge is rotated by the main motor.

Stirring rod

Toner supply port

Toner Cartridge lever

● Pre-delivery of the Toner


The host machine requests UGW for pre-delivery of the toner when remaining quantity of the toner in the Developing Assembly
reaches to the value setted in service mode. The setting value is available to set in between 0 to 40% in the service mode. The
host machine notifies UGW for replacement complete when toner level detection signal from antenna sensor detects toner exist
level after replacement the toner cartridge.

<Related Service Mode>


• COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > T-DLV-BK
Set toner low alarm notice timing

■ Transfer Unit
A transfer unit consists of a Transfer Roller and a Static Eliminator. A transfer roller rotates following the photosensitive drum
rotation.

Static eliminator

Transfer roller

50
2. Technical Explanation

● Transfer Roller Bias Control


Negative bias, sheet-to-sheet bias, or positive bias is applied to the transfer roller according to the type of sequence. The positive
bias value is decided on the environment and paper type. The environment is detected on the Environment Sensor (HU1).

Photosensitive drum

Static eliminator

Environment sensor

Transfer Roller
HVT PCB

[1] [2] [3]

Static eliminator bias Transfer bias


control circuit control circuit
Controller PCB

No. Name
[1] Separation static eliminator bias control signal
[2] Transfer bias control signal
[3] Environment sensor detection signal

● Cleaning Bias Control


Cleaning bias applies negatively-charged voltage at the last rotation. Attached toner on the transfer roller is returned to the
photosensitive drum.

● Separation static eliminator bias control


Two types of negatively-charged voltages, weak and strong biases, are applied to the static eliminator according to the print mode
and sequence. The paper is easily separated from the photosensitive drum by reducing electrostatic absorption force.

51
2. Technical Explanation

Fixing System

Overview
■ Features
This machine introduces the on-demand fixing method.

Fixing film unit

Pressure roller Fixing inlet guide


(upper)
Fixing inlet guide
(lower)

■ Specifications
Item Function/method
Fixing method On-demand fixing
Fixing heater Ceramic heater
Control temperature 185 deg C (A4/plain paper) *1
Temperature detection By the main thermistor and the sub thermistor
Edge heat rising prevention con- Down sequence control
trol
Fixing loop control Arch sensor (SR211)
Protective Function Main thermistor and Sub thermistor
Thermo switch (operating temperature: 250 +/- 7 deg C)

*1. Target temperature is specified depending on the paper size, the fixing mode, the number of prints, the fixing temperature at
the start of warm-up control.

52
2. Technical Explanation

■ Major parts configuration

Fixing film unit

Pressure roller

Thermo switch (TP1)

Fixing delivery sensor (SR201)

Fixing heater (H1/H2)

Main thermistor (TH1)

Sub thermistor (TH2)

No. Part name Function / method


- Fixing film unit Applying heat and pressure makes the toner image on paper fixed (fused).
- Pressure roller
H1/H2 Fixing heater Ceramic heater
TH1 Main thermistor To be in contact with the heater
Temperature control, detection of abnormal temperature rise
TH2 Sub thermistor (rear) To be in contact with the heater (non-feeding area)
Temperature control, detection of abnormal temperature rise, temperature detec-
tion/cooling control on the edges
TP1 Thermo switch Non-contact type with the heater
To block AC electric power supply when a failure is detected.
SR201 Fixing delivery sensor Jam detection

Controls
■ Fixing temperature control
● Print temperature control
To increase temperature to meet the fixing target temperature and keep the target temperature during printing
• Startup (warm-up rotation) temperature control
• Print temperature control
• Sheet-to-sheet temperature control

● Down sequence control


To prevent fixing failure due to rising temperature at the edge or fall in temperature. This control causes reduced the productivity
(through-put).
• Down sequence when printing continuously
• Down sequence when overheating inside the machine
• Down sequence when switching paper size

53
2. Technical Explanation

■ Print temperature control


Fixing
temperature

STBY INTR PRNT

Startup During-print Sheet-t


(Initial control o-sheet
rotation) temperature control
control temperature
temperature

Time

Command for
print start

● Startup (warm-up rotation) temperature control


To increase fixing temperature to be ready for printing after receiving the print-start command.

● Print temperature control


To set optimal target temperature to prevent fixing failure or offset, and keep the specified target temperature during printing.
1. Setting target temperature
Target temperature is specified depending on the paper type, paper size, elapsed time since the last control (including the
standby control) of fixing temperature and fixing temperature at the start of warm-up control.

54
2. Technical Explanation

2. Temperature control during printing


When the paper passes in the fixing unit, the fixing temperature is controlled to keep the target value (see the table on the
next page) according to the detection result of main thermistor.

Target temperature during printing


The control temperature is determined according to the fixing mode or to the fixing temperature at the start of warm-up control.
The 6 modes are provided as the fixing mode for the selected feed table and paper type.
As an example, the following table is the control temperature.
Condition: Normal temperature /normal humidity. The fixing temperature is less than 110 deg C at the start of warm-up
control. A4 paper

Fixing mode Setting Target temperature (deg C)


1-sided/first of 2-sided Second of 2-si-
ded
Plain paper Color paper, recycled paper, plain 1 to 25 sheets: 185 The target temper-
paper (64 to 90 g/m2), prepunched 26 to 45 sheets: 180 ature in 1-sided/first
paper 46 to 80 sheets: 175 of 2-sided is set to
After 81 sheets : 170 10 deg C low.
Heavy paper 1 Heavy paper 1 (91 to 105 g/m2), 1 to 9 sheets: 190
label 10 to 14 sheets: 185
After 15 sheets : 180
Heavy paper 2 Heavy paper 2 (106 to 128 g/m2) 1 to 9 sheets: 205
10 to 15 sheets: 200
After 16 sheets : 195
Bond paper Bond paper (75 to 90 g/m2) 1 to 50 sheets: 205
After 51 sheets : 200
Transparency Transparency 1 to 25 sheets: 200
26 to 45 sheets: 195
46 to 80 sheets: 190
After 81 sheets : 185
Envelope Envelope 1 to 2 sheets: 210
3 to 6 sheets: 205
7 to 30 sheets: 200
After 31 sheets : 195

3. Sheet-to-sheet distance temperature control


To prevent the excessive temperature rise and to save the power consumption, the target temperature is set low from the
printing temperature.

Fixing mode Target temperature (deg C)


Plain paper, heavy paper 1, Transparency Target temperature – 5
Heavy paper 2, Bond paper Target temperature – 15
Envelope Same as target temperature

<Related Service Mode>


• COPIER > OPTION > BODY > TEMPCON2
Set fixing control temperature table: Plain paper mode
• COPIER > OPTION > BODY > TEMP-CON
Set fixing control temperature table: Heavy paper mode
• COPIER > OPTION > BODY > TMP-TB15
2-sided curl correction mode

■ Down sequence control


● Down sequence when printing continuously
Purpose:
To prevent temperature rise of non-feeding area in the case of continuous print, fixing offset or deterioration of fixing film.
Starting conditions:
The down sequence is performed step by step. When the detected temperature of sub thermistor reaches the following
temperature or higher for 400 msec continuously, the productivity decreases every one step.

55
2. Technical Explanation

Size Down sequence shift temp


A3, A4, LTR, 11x17 285 deg C
Except A3, A4, LTR, 11x17 255 deg C

Operation:
Temperature is reduced by making wider sheet-to-sheet distance with the maximum 5 steps to control the temperature at lower
than the target temperature for normal print. The productivity according to paper type is shown below.

Fixing Step A3 A4 B4 B5 A4R A5 A5R Free size


mode 11x17 LTR LGL EXEC LTRR STMT B5R
16K 8K STMTR
16KR
1 5 11 8 19 10 21 10 4
2 2 4 6 18 9 19 8 3
Plain pa-
3 2 2 4 17 8 18 7 3
per
4 2 2 4 12 4 12 4 3
5 2 2 4 7 4 7 4 3
1 4 5 5 8 8 8 6 3
2 2 2 4 6 6 6 5 2
Heavy
3 2 2 3 4 4 4 4 2
paper 2
4 2 2 3 4 4 4 3 2
5 2 2 3 4 4 4 3 2
1 5 11 8 19 10 21 10 4
2 2 4 6 18 9 19 8 3
Transpar-
3 2 2 4 17 8 18 7 3
ency
4 2 2 4 12 4 12 4 3
5 2 2 4 7 4 7 4 3
1 3 4 4 5 4 5 4 3
2 2 2 2 4 3 4 3 2
Bond pa-
3 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 2
per
4 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 2
5 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 2
1 4 7 6 10 8 10 8 4
2 2 2 5 8 6 8 6 3
Heavy
3 2 2 3 4 4 6 4 3
paper 1
4 2 2 3 4 4 4 4 3
5 2 2 3 4 4 4 4 3
1 - - - - - - - 4
2 - - - - - - - 3
Envelope 3 - - - - - - - 3
4 - - - - - - - 3
5 - - - - - - - 3

Completion conditions:
When the fixing temperature reaches 175 deg C and lower for 400 msec continuously, the productivity returns to the normal step.

56
2. Technical Explanation

Normal

1st step

2nd step Return


175 deg C,400msec continuous detection
3rd step

4th step

5th step

<Related Service Mode>


• COPIER > OPTION > BODY > FIX-OFST
Change of detection temperature for the fixing edge temperature

● Down sequence when overheating inside the machine


Purpose:
The temperature in the drum unit is controlled by less than 53 deg C referring to the detection temperature of the environmental
sensor.
Starting conditions:
• When the detection temperature of the environmental sensor is more than specified temperature at the print start. (Operation
in down sequence [A] of the following table)
• When the alarm of the environmental sensor occurred. (Operation in down sequence [B] of the following table)
Operation:

Down sequence [A] Down sequence [B]


Environmental sensor Detection temperature: 35 deg C Detection temperature: 37 deg C
Print image number More than 250 *1 More than 100
Sheet-to-sheet target temperature 120 deg C
Print speed (1-sided/2- sided) 12/12 8/10
Last rotation time 60 sec

*1: When the number of the images after the print end does not reach 250, the printing image count is stored. Then the count
value is continued on the next print.

● Down sequence when switching paper size


Purpose:
This down sequence prevents temperature rise of non-feeding area: there can be possible fixing offset or wrinkle of the succeeding
paper due to increased temperature of non-feeding area of the preceding paper when continuously making prints or feeding wider
length of paper than the preceding paper.

57
2. Technical Explanation

Non-feeding area

Film
A4R A4

Non-feeding area

Starting conditions:
1. If the detected temperature of the sub thermistor reaches 125 deg C and above when switching to the paper which has longer
width than the preceding paper.
2. If the detected temperature of the sub thermistor reaches 125 deg C and above and the calculation temperature of Pressure
roller reaches 140 deg C and above.
Operation:
Pickup of the succeeding paper and power distribution to the heater are stopped as well to decrease the fixing temperature.
Completion conditions:
When the detected temperature of the sub thermistor reaches less than 125 deg C.

■ User mode related to fixing grade


The fixing grade is affected by some special modes in user mode which change the control temperature or productivity. The
related modes are as follows.

Special Mode N
Outline Thin paper curl correction mode
Use case When paper jams occur in 2-sided printing using the curled paper and moist paper.
Details Paper jams may frequently occur when performing 2-sided printing, depending on the paper type (especially
with curled paper and damp paper). In this case, change this setting to Mode 1 (N1 mode) or Mode 2 (N3
mode).
N1 mode: Lower the fixing target temperature for all paper type.
N3 mode: Plain paper and special mode P are effective only in ON.
When the Mode 1/2 is set, the productivity decreases for initial rotation extension. Image failure by the lack of
transfer may occur so that the transfer electric current flows into the separation.
Set range Off: Mode1: N1 mode, Mode2: N3 mode
Default value Off

Special Mode S
Outline Shortening of wait time after the paper size change
Use case Shortening of wait time after the paper size change
Details When the paper size is changed, the machine stops operation until it is ready to feed different size paper.
Printed paper may curl by the paper type and the use environment.
Set range Off: wait time 120 seconds, Mode1: wait time 0 seconds, Mode2: wait time 10 seconds
Default value Off

Special Mode P
Outline The fixing control temperature mode of the curl prevention
Use case When the paper curl occurs
Details Lower the fixing control temperature in the plain paper mode.
Set range Off, On

58
2. Technical Explanation

Special Mode P
Default value Off

■ Paper loop amount control before fixing


Purpose:
To get a proper image by avoiding a shock when the trailing edge of paper comes out of the registration roles, an appropriate
paper loop is formed between transfer roller and fixing roller.

Pressure roller Fixing film

Sensor: OFF

Drum

Arch sensor (SR211)

Sensor: ON

Transfer roller

Registration roller

Starting conditions:
This control is performed at every paper feeding.
Operation:
The fixing motor drive speed is controlled as follows by detecting the paper loop between transfer roller and fixing roller with the
arch sensor.
1. The fixing motor drive speed is reduced when the reading edge of paper is fed 35mm from the transfer roller. The reduced
speed is kept until the arch sensor is turned on by the formed paper loop.
2. After detecting the ON condition of the arch sensor for 50 msec continuously, the fixing motor drive speed is increased
compared with the process speed. The increased speed is kept until the arch sensor is turned off by the deleted paper loop.
3. After detecting the OFF condition of the arch sensor for 50 msec continuously, thefixing motor drive speed is reduced
compared with the process speed. The reduced speed is kept until the arch sensor is turned on by the formed paper loop.
4. Repeat steps 2) and 3). The fixing motor drive speed is increased compared with the process speed when the trailing edge
of paper is fed 10 from the transfer roller.
5. When continuously making prints, return to step 1). When making a single print, shift to the last rotation.

■ Protection features
Code Description Error Clear
E000 Fixing assembly temperature insufficient rise at the startup temperature control Yes
0000 The fixing assembly does not rise to the constant temperature within specified time at the
startup temperature control.
E001 Fixing assembly temperature abnormal rise Yes
0000 The reading of the main thermistor is 240 deg C or more.
0001 The reading of the sub thermistor is 295 deg C or more.
E002 Fixing assembly temperature insufficient rise at the print temperature control Yes
0000 The fixing assembly does not rise to the constant temperature within specified time at the print
temperature control.
E003 Low fixing temperature detection after standby Yes
0000 The reading of the main thermistor is less than specified temperature.
0001 The reading of the sub thermistor is less than specified temperature.
E004 Thermistor disconnection detection error No
0000 When thermistor disconnection is detected without specified time.
E014 The fixing pressure or release is not possible by the fixing motor (M201). No

59
2. Technical Explanation

Code Description Error Clear


E014 0001 Driving the fixing motor, the fixing release is not detected by the fixing pressure release sensor No
(SR202).
0002 Driving the fixing motor, the fixing pressure is not detected by the fixing pressure release
sensor (SR202).
E261 Error in zero cross No
0000 Zero cross error is detected.

<Related Service Mode>


• COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR
Clear of error code

60
2. Technical Explanation

Pickup/Feed System

Overview
■ Specification
Item Description
Paper storage method Front loading method
Pickup method Cassette 1 Pad separation method
Cassette 2 Retard separation method
Multi-purpose tray Pad separation method
Paper stacking capacity Cassette 1 250 sheets(80g/m2), 300 sheets(64g/m2)
Cassette 2 250 sheets(80g/m2), 300 sheets(64g/m2)
Multi-purpose tray 80 sheets(80g/m2), 100 sheets(64g/m2)
Paper feed reference Center reference
Paper size Cassette 1 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11 x 17, LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMTR, OFFICIO, Ecuador-
OFFICIO, Brazil-OFFICIO, Mexico-OFFICIO, Argentina-OFFICIO, A-LTR, A-LTRR,
GLTR, GLTR-R, GLGL, AUS-FOOLSCAP, FOOLSCAP, 8K, 16K, 16KR, F4A, India-
LGL
Cassette 2 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11 x 17, LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, 8K, 16K, 16KR
Multi-purpose tray A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 11 x 17, LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, STMTR, EXEC,
OFFICIO, Ecuador-OFFICIO, Brazil-OFFICIO, Mexico-OFFICIO, Argentina-OFFICIO,
A-LTR, A-LTRR, GLTR, GLTR-R, GLGL, AUS-FOOLSCAP, FOOLSCAP, 8K, 16K,
16KR, F4A, India-LGL, Custom paper size (95 x 148mm to 297 x 431.8mm), Envelopes
(No.10(COM10), Monarch, ISO-C5, DL)
Paper grammage Cassette 64 to 90g/m2
Multi-purpose tray 64 to 128g/m2
Paper size switching Cassette By the user
Multi-purpose tray By the user
Duplexing method Through path
Option Cassette Feeding Module-AD1 (standard model presence)
Duplex Unit-C1 (standard model presence)
Cassette Heater Unit-40
FL Cassette-BB1

61
2. Technical Explanation

■ Parts Configuration
● Arrangement of Rollers

[15]

[14]

[13]

[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]

[1]

No. Name Remarks


[1] Cassette 2 pickup roller If equipped with the 1-cassette module.
[2] Cassette 2 separation roller If equipped with the 1-cassette module.
[3] Cassette 2 feed roller If equipped with the 1-cassette module.
[4] Vertical path roller If equipped with the 1-cassette module.
[5] Cassette 1 separation pad -
[6] Cassette 1 pickup roller -
[7] Multi purpose tray separation pad -
[8] Multi purpose tray pickup roller -
[9] Feed roller -
[10] Registration roller -
[11] Duplex roller 2 If equipped with the duplex unit
[12] Drum -
[13] Duplex roller 1 If equipped with the duplex unit
[14] Fixing film -
[15] Delivery roller -

62
2. Technical Explanation

● Arrangement of Sensors

SR212

SR203
SR201

SR503 SR211

SR207

SR502

No. Name Remarks


SR201 Fixing delivery sensor -
SR203 Delivery sensor Network model only
SR207 Pre-registration sensor -
SR211 Arch sensor -
SR212 Delivery Full Sensor Network FAX model only
SR502 Cassette 2 pickup sensor If equipped with the 1-cassette module.
SR503 Duplex feed sensor If equipped with the duplex unit.

● Route of Drive
It is different whether the drive motor of the delivery roller attaches the duplex unit.

M502 M201

M501

*1

M202

CL203
CL201
SL201
CL202
SL202
CL501

SL501

63
2. Technical Explanation

No. Name Remarks


M201 Fixing motor -
M202 Main motor -
M501 Duplex motor If equipped with the duplex unit.
M502 Reverse motor If equipped with the duplex unit.
CL201 Multi-purpose tray feed clutch -
CL202 Cassette feed clutch -
CL203 Registration clutch -
CL501 Cassette 2 drive clutch If equipped with the 1-cassette module.
SL201 Multi-purpose tray pickup solenoid -
SL202 Cassette 1 pickup solenoid -
SL501 Cassette 2 pickup solenoid -

■ Diagram of Paper Paths


● If not equipped with the Duplex Unit

Delivery to tray

Pickup from
multi purpose tray

Pickup from cassette 1

Pickup from cassette 2

64
2. Technical Explanation

● If equipped with the Duplex Unit

Delivery to tray
Duplex re-pickup

Pickup from
multi purpose tray

Pickup from cassette 1

Pickup from cassette 2

Controls
■ Overview
Duplex feed control

Fixing/registration
assembly

Multi-purpose
pickup assembly

Cassette pickup
assembly

Area Detection, Control


Cassette pickup assembly Outline
Paper size detection
Paper presence detection
Cassette heater control
Multi-purpose pickup assembly Outline
Paper presence detection
Paper size detection
Post-pickup control after multi-purpose tray pickup

65
2. Technical Explanation

Area Detection, Control


Fixing/registration assembly Registration control
Duplex/delivery assembly Outline
Drive change
Circulation number of sheets in the duplex printing
Delivery full detection
JAM detection JAM detection

■ Cassette Pickup Assembly


● Overview
The paper inside the cassette 1 is held up by the lifter plate.
When pickup takes place, the cassette 1 pickup solenoid (SL202) is turned on, and the pickup roller is moved down. When the
pickup roller comes into contact with the surface of paper, the sheet is picked up by rotation of the roller.
Only a single sheet of paper picked up is moved to the feed path by the pickup roller and the separation pad, and moved as far
as the registration roller by the feed roller.
The feed roller and the pickup roller are driven by the main motor (M202).
Refer to the service manual of Cassette Feeding Module for the pickup control of cassette 2.

M202
[4]

CL202
SL202
[3]
[2]

[1]

No. Name No. Name


[1] Lifter plate [3] Pickup roller
[2] Separation pad [4] Feed roller

● Paper Size Detection


When the size group detected by the cassette large size sensor (SR206) accorded with the paper size set on the operation pannel,
the paper size of cassette 1 is decided.
The size group of the cassette large size sensor (SR206) is detected by adjusting the position of the rear edge guide plate. When
the size group which the cassette large size sensor detected did not accord with paper size set on the operation panel, the alarm
is displayed.
This machine does not have the cassette presence detection function.

Link
SR206 Rear edge guide plate

66
2. Technical Explanation

Size group Length direction [mm] Paper size


Small size (Cassette large size sensor OFF) 182.0 B5
195.0 K16
203.2 GLTR
210.0 A4/A4R
215.9 LTR/STMTR
220.0 A-LTR
Large size (Cassette large size sensor ON) 25.70 B5R
266.7 GLTR-R
270.0 K16R
279.4 LTRR
280.0 A-LTRR
297.0 A4R
317.5 OFFICIO
320.0 Ecuador-OFFICIO
330.2 GLGL/FLS
337.0 AFLS
340.0 Argentina-OFFICIO
341.0 Mexico-OFFICIO
342.9 F4A
345.0 India-LGL
355.0 Brazil-OFFICIO
355.6 LGL
364.0 B4
390.0 K8
420.0 A3
431.8 11 x 17

● Paper Presence Detection


Paper presence is detected by the cassette 1 paper sensor (SR205).
This machine does not have the paper level function in the cassette.

SR205

Cassette 1 paper sensor Paper level Display on the control panel


OFF Paper presence

ON Paper absence

● Cassette Heater Control


This machine can install the optional cassette heater to suppress the moisture absorption of the paper in the cassette.

67
2. Technical Explanation

The heater kit is required installing the cassette heater.

Heater PCB

Cassette heater (Cassette 1)

Cassette heater (Cassette 2)

<Heater operating condition>

Cassette heater
Turning on the heater switch Standby mode OFF
Printing OFF
Turning off the main power switch ON
Sleep mode 1 ON
Sleep mode 2 ON

■ Multi-Purpose Pickup Assembly


● Overview
The paper in the tray of the multi-purpose pickup assembly is forced against the multipurpose tray pickup roller by the work of
the lifter plate, and only a single sheet of paper is separated and moved into the machine by the work of the multi-purpose tray
pickup roller and the separation pad.

M202
Multi-purpose
tray pickup roller

CL201

SL201

Multi-purpose tray

Multi-purpose tray
Lifter plate
separation pad

● Paper Presence Detection


The paper presence is detected by the multi-purpose tray paper sensor (SR210). When the paper absence is detected, if there
is the same size and same type paper exists in other cassette, auto cassette change is executed.

68
2. Technical Explanation

● Paper Size Detection


This machine does not have the paper size detection function. The user must set the size of the paper in the multi-purpose tray
using the operation panel, or the user must register a fixed size in the user mode.

● Post-pickup Control after Multi-purpose Tray Pickup


Paper pickup operation ends when paper is pressed against the registration roller. After this, the registration roller starts rotating
and the multi-purpose tray feed clutch (CL201) turns on. This clutch turns off after feeding the paper by the distance equivalent
to the paper size - 119.2 mm (*1) -5 mm (*2).
*1 Distance that paper is fed from the multi-purpose tray pickup roller to the registration roller.
*2 Paper is post-fed to the point which is 5 mm to the training edge.
When the paper size is not specified, paper is post-fed by the distance equivalent to the multi paper feed enabled size (139.8
mm in longitudinal direction).
Minimum post-feed distance: 139.8 mm - 119.2 mm -5 mm = 15.6 mm

■ Fixing / Registration Assembly


● Registration Control
The registration roller is driven by the main motor (M202).
In between the registration roller and the main motor is the registration clutch (CL203), servicing to turn on and off the registration
roller so that the paper will be matched in relation to the image on the drum at correct registration.

M202

CL203

Registration roller

■ Duplex / Delivery Assembly


● Outline
After the fixing delivery sensor (SR201) is turned off, the paper is fed to the reverse point. Then the reverse motor (M502) turns
in reverse direction, and the paper is led to the duplex unit .
The paper led to the duplex unit is fed by two duplex rollers to the registration roller.
The duplex roller 1/2 is driven by the duplex motor (M501).
The paper feed path is provided with two photo interrupters, duplex feed sensor (SR503) and delivery sensor (SR203).

69
2. Technical Explanation

M502
Duplex unit

M501

Delivery roller

S203

SR201
Reverse point

SR503 Duplex roller 1

Duplex roller 2

● Drive Change
If equpped with the duplex unit , the drive of the delivery roller transmitted by the fixtig motor (M201) is changed by the movement
of the swing gear.
The drive of the delivery roller is transmitted by the reversal motor (M502) and the delivery roller rotates.

Duplex unit

Delivery roller

Swing gear

● Circulation Number of Sheets in the Duplex Printing


Following is the circulation number of sheets by size.

Paper size Circulation number of sheets


A4, A5, A5R, B5, LTR, EXEC, STMTR, 16K , GLTR 2
Besides the above 1

● Delivery full detection


Delivery full detection is operate in Network FAX model.
When the papers are stack on the Delivery Tray, Full Detection Flag is moved up depending on the stack height. If the paper are
stacked specified height, Delivery Full Sensor (SR212) turns on and detects delivery full.
If deliverry full is detected during printing, printing is stopped until remove the paper on the Delivery Tray.
Delivery full detection is enabled when main power is turned ON, turn Stand by status from the Sleep, cover is opened or closed
and printing.

70
2. Technical Explanation

Full Detection Flag

SR212

Delivery Tray

■ Detecting Jams

S203
SR201

SR503 SR211

SR207

SR502

ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor ID Sensor Name


0 0104 Delay jam SR207 Pre-registration sensor
SR502 Cassette 2 pickup sensor
0 0208 Stationary jam SR207 Pre-registration sensor
0 010C Delay jam SR201 Fixing delivery sensor
SR203* Delivery sensor
0 0210 Stationary jam SR201 Fixing delivery sensor
SR203* Delivery sensor
0 1014 Stationary jam SR201 Fixing delivery sensor
SR203* Delivery sensor
SR207 Pre-registration sensor
SR211 Arch sensor
SR502 Cassette 2 pickup sensor
SR503 Duplex feed sensor
0 1118 Cover open jam - -
0 0221 Stationary jam SR203* Delivery sensor
0 0124 Delay jam SR503 Duplex feed sensor

*Network model only

71
2. Technical Explanation

Monitoring Function (e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote)

Overview of System
■ Function Overview
Embedded RDS (hereinafter referred to as E-RDS) is a monitoring program that runs on the host machine. When the monitoring
option is enabled by making the setting on this machine, information such as the status change of the machine, counter
information, and failure information are collected. The collected device information is sent to a remote maintenance server called
UGW (Universal Gateway Server) via Internet, thus allowing for e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote (Remote Diagnosis
System).
The following device information/ status can be monitored.
• Billing counts
• Parts counter
• Firmware info
• Service call error log
• Jam log
• Alarm log
• Status changes (Toner low/ out, etc.)
Since high confidentiality is required for the information shown above, it performs communication between this machine and the
UGW using HTTPS/ SOAP protocol.

Customer
Environment UGW
This machine

Internet

Firewall

Sales Company

Administrator
DNS Server Proxy Server

The e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system configuration

■ Features
E-RDS is embedded in the network module of the device, and the front-end module of the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote
system is realized without requiring hardware besides the device.

■ Main Functions
Functional cat- Sub category Description
egory
Communication COM-TEST Execute service mode to communicate with the server, retrieve schedule informa-
test tion, and establish communication.
Transmission of Billing/all resources/parts coun- Periodically send billing/all resources/parts counters to the server.
counters ters
Transmission of Alerts Each time the status of the device is changed, the status information is sent to the
event logs server.
Service call/alarm/jam log Each time a service call, alarm, or jam log occurs, the error log is sent to the server.
Data transmis- ROM version Periodically send firmware information of the device.
sion Schedule Periodically send schedule information of the device.
Debug log Send debug information of E-RDS which exceeds a specific size to the server.

72
2. Technical Explanation

Functional cat- Sub category Description


egory
Operation in- Operation check Contact the server to check if there is processing to be executed, and receive the
struction following instructions if any.
• Change the schedule
• Change the alarm level
• Change the alert filter

Service cautions
• After clearing the Main Controller PCB, initialization of the E-RDS setting (ERDS-DAT) and a communication test (COMTEST)
need to be performed. Failure to do so will result that the counter transmitting value to the UGW may become unusual.
Also, after replacing the main controller board, all settings must be reprogrammed.
• The following settings in service mode must not be change unless there are specific instructions to do so.
Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW.
• Port number of UGW
[COPIER] > [FUNCTION] > [INSTALL] > [RGW-PORT]
Default : 443
• If the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote contract of the device is invalid, be sure to turn OFF the E-RDS setting (E-RDS :
0).
• When the E-RDS function is enabled, a communication test can be performed from [Check Counter] of the machine's Control
Panel.*1
When conducting a communication test from [Check Counter], pay attention to the following points:
• During a communication test, do not take any actions such as pressing a key. Actions are not accepted until the
communication test is completed (actions are ignored).
• When a communication test is being conducted from service mode or from [Check Counter], do not conduct a
communication test from the other. Such operation is not guaranteed.

Setting Procedure
■ Preparation
Since this function communicates with the UGW server, it is necessary to connect to the external network.
Check the following items, and make the settings if not yet set.
• IP address settings
• DNS server settings
• Proxy server settings*2
• Installation of CA certificate (arbitrary *3 )

CAUTION:
• Obtain the information on the network environment from the system administrator of the user.
• When having changed the network settings, turn OF and then ON the main power of the machine.

■ Procedure for Setting E-RDS


1. Select and execute the following service mode to initialize the setting value of E-RDS.
• [COPIER] > [FUNCTION] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT]

*1. The user can perform a communication test or browse the result of communication test.
[Counter Check]key > [Monitoring Service] > [Communication Test]
If the communication results in failure, an error code (hexadecimal number, 8 digit) is displayed on the Control Panel.
*2. If authentication is necessary, make the settings of the authentication information as well.
*3. When using a certificate other than those pre-installed in the device

73
2. Technical Explanation

NOTE:
This operation initializes the E-RDS settings to factory setting values.
For the setting values to be initialized, see the section of “ Setting values and data to be initialized” on page 74.

2. Enable the E-RDS function in the following service mode, and perform a communication test.
1. Select the following item:
• [COPIER] > [FUNCTION] > [INSTALL] > [ERDS]
2. Enter [1] from the keyboard, and press [Apply].

CAUTION:
The following settings i.e. RGW-PORT in Service mode must not be change unless there are specific instructions to do so.
Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW.

When the E-RDS function is enabled, the function to communicate with UGW is enabled.

3. Select and execute [COM-TEST].


The result of the communication test will not be displayed.
The result will be displayed if the communication test is conducted from the [Counter Check] key or [Network Settings] >
[Monitoring Service] > [Communication Test].

CAUTION:
The state of communication with UGW can be judged also by referring to COM-LOG. By performing the communication
test with UGW, E-RDS acquires schedule information and starts monitoring and meter reads operation.

Maintenace
■ Initializing E-RDS settings
It is possible to clear the FLASH data of E-RDS and change the E-RDS setting back to the default value.

● Initialization procedure
Follow the procedure shown below to initialize E-RDS.

1. Enter service mode as a system administrator user.

2. Select and execute the following service mode.


• [COPIER] > [FUNCTION] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT]

● Setting values and data to be initialized


The following E-RDS settings, internal data, and Alarm filtering information are initialized.
• [COPIER] > [FUNCTION] > [INSTALL] > [ERDS]
• [COPIER] > [FUNCTION] > [INSTALL] > [RGW-PORT]
• [COPIER] > [FUNCTION] > [INSTALL] > [COM-LOG]

CAUTION:
If a certificate other than the CA certificate at the time of shipment has been installed, initializing the E-RDS setting will not
change the settings back to those at the time of shipment. To change the certificate back to the CA certificate at the time
of shipment, delete the certificate (install the CA certificate at the time of shipment) after initializing the E-RDS settings.
Procedure for Setting E-RDS “Procedure for Setting E-RDS” on page 73.

■ Report Output of Communication Error Log (COM-LOG)


A report of communication error log information on five affairs can be output.

74
2. Technical Explanation

● Report output procedure


1. Select the following service mode.
• [COPIER] > [FUNCTION] > [MISC-P] > [ERDS-LOG]

12/09 2015 10:14AM


****************************
*** E-RDS-COM-LOG***
****************************
No.01 DATE 12/09 2015 TIME 03:21 AM CODE 05000003
Information SUSPEND: Communication test is not performed.
No.02 DATE 12/09 2015 TIME 03:21 AM CODE 00000000
Information SUSPEND: mode changed.
No.03 DATE 12/09 2015 TIME 03:18 AM CODE 05000003
Information SUSPEND: Communication test is not performed.
No.04 DATE 12/09 2015 TIME 03:18 AM CODE 00000000
Information SUSPEND: mode changed.
No.05 DATE 12/09 2015 TIME 01:56 AM CODE 05000003
Information SUSPEND: Communication test is not performed.

Output sample

75
3 Periodical Service
Periodical Service Operation Item.......77
3. Periodical Service

Periodical Service Operation Item


Replace the consumable parts shown below as a periodical service.

[2]

[3]

[6]

[7]

[1]
[8]

[4]

[5]

[9]

No. System Items Parts No. Q’ty Interval Replace- Counter name Remarks Refer-
Network Local ment ence
print time
Model
1 Image Trans- FE3-2866 1 150,000 About 1 “Remov-
formation fer roll- sheets minute ing the
system er DRBL-1 TR-ROLL - Transfer
Roller” on
page 112
2 Devel- (EU) FM1-B029 1 150,000 About 2 “Remov-
opin- (Latin America)FM1- sheets minute ing the De-
gas- F146 DV-UNT- veloping
DRBL-1 -
sembly (Asia)FM1-F147 K Assembly”
on page
110
3 Fixing Fixing (Latin None 1 150,000 About 6 “Remov-
system unit(12 America): sheets minute ing the Fix-
0V) FM1-F164 - ing As-
(Taiwan) sembly” on
FM1-F165 page 113
DRBL-1 FX-UNIT
Fixing (EU) FM1- (EU) FM1- 1 150,000 About 6 “Remov-
unit(23 F162 F160 sheets minute ing the Fix-
0V) (Asia) (Asia)FM1 - ing As-
FM1-F163 -F161 sembly” on
page 113

77
3. Periodical Service

No. System Items Parts No. Q’ty Interval Replace- Counter name Remarks Refer-
Network Local ment ence
print time
Model
4 Pickup Multi- FL2-3202 1 150,000 About 4 “Remov-
system pur- sheets minutes ing the
pose Multi-pur-
tray DRBL-1 M-PU-RL - pose Tray
pickup Pickup
roller Roller” on
page 117
5 Multi- FL2-3201 1 150,000 About 4 “Remov-
pur- sheets minutes ing the
pose Multi-pur-
tray pose Tray
DRBL-1 M-SP-PD -
separa- Separa-
tion tion Pad”
pad on page
118
6 Cas- FL3-1352 1 150,000 About 1 “Remov-
sette1 sheets minute ing the
pickup Cassette 1
DRBL-1 C1-PU-RL -
roller Pickup
Roller” on
page 119
7 Cas- FL3-1447 1 150,000 About 1 “Remov-
sette 1 sheets minute ing the
separa- Cassette 1
tion DRBL-1 C1-SP-RL - Separa-
pad tion Pad”
on page
118
8 Cas- (China only) FC8-0170 1 100,000 About 1 Equipping
sette 2 (Other than China) sheets minute the cas-
DRBL-2 C2-FD-RL -
feed FF6-1621 sette unit
roller
9 Cas- FF6-1621 1 100,000 About 1 Equipping
sette 2 sheets minute the cas-
separa- DRBL-2 C2-SP-RL sette unit -
tion
roller

78
4 Disassembly/
Assembly
List of Parts......................................... 80
External / Internal Cover..................... 91
Original Exposure................................98
Main Controller..................................102
Laser Exposure System.................... 109
Image Formation System.................. 110
Fixing System....................................113
Pickup/Feed System......................... 117
4. Disassembly/Assembly

List of Parts

List of External / Internal Cover


■ Front Side

[1]

[10]

[2]

[3]
[9]

[4]

[8] [7] [6] [5]

No. Name Reference


[1] Reader Upper Unit “Removing the Reader Upper Unit” on page 99
[2] Delivery Tray Cover “Removing the Delivery Tray Cover” on page 95
[3] Control Panel Unit “Removing the Control Panel Unit” on page 94
[4] Right Front Cover “Removing the Right Front Cover” on page 95
[5] Cassette 1 “Removing the Cassette 1” on page 94
[6] Front Cover “Removing the Front Cover” on page 91
[7] Left Front Cover “Removing the Left Front Cover” on page 96
[8] Reader Front Cover “Removing the Reader Front Cover” on page 93
[9] Left Cover Unit “Removing the Left Cover Unit” on page 91
[10] Reader Lower Unit “Removing the Reader Lower Unit” on page 100

80
4. Disassembly/Assembly

■ Rear Side

[11]

[13]
[12]

No. Name Reference


[11] Reader Rear Cover “Removing the Reader Rear Cover” on page 92
[12] Rear Cove “Removing the Rear Cover” on page 91
[13] Right Cover “Removing the Right Cover” on page 93

■ Internal View

[14]

No. Name Reference


[14] Front Inner Cover “Removing the Front Inner Cover” on page 96

81
4. Disassembly/Assembly

List of Main Unit


■ List of Main Unit(1/2)

[1]
[2]
[3]

[5]

[7]

[4]

[6]

No. Name Reference


[1] Reader Upper Unit “Removing the Reader Upper Unit” on page 99
[2] Reader Lower Unit “Removing the Reader Lower Unit” on page 100
[3] Reader Unit “Removing the Reader Unit” on page 101
[4] Control Panel Unit “Removing the Control Panel Unit” on page 94
[5] Fixing Unit -
[6] Laser Scanner Unit “Removing the Laser Scanner Unit” on page 109
[7] Main Drive Unit “Removing the Main Drive Unit” on page 121

82
4. Disassembly/Assembly

■ List of Main Unit(2/2)

[11]

[9]

[8]

[10]

No. Name Reference


[8] Left Cover Unit “Removing the Left Cover Unit” on page 91
[9] Transfer Unit -
[10] Multi-purpose Tray Unit -
[11] Fixing Assembly “Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 113

83
4. Disassembly/Assembly

List of periodically replacement parts, consumable parts and


locations for cleaning

[2]

[3]

[6]

[7]

[1]
[8]

[4]

[5]

[9]

No. Name Constitution Unit Reference Remarks


[1] Transfer Roller Transfer Unit “Removing the Trans-
fer Roller” on page -
112
[2] Developing Assembly “Removing the Devel-
- oping Assembly” on -
page 110
[3] Fixing Assembly “Removing the Fixing
- Assembly” on page -
113
[4] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller Multi-purpose Tray Unit “Removing the Multi-
purpose Tray Pickup -
Roller” on page 117
[5] Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad Multi-purpose Tray Unit “Removing the Multi-
purpose Tray Separa-
-
tion Pad” on page
118
[6] Cassette 1 Pickup Roller Main Unit “Removing the Cas-
sette 1 Pickup Roller” -
on page 119
[7] Cassette 1 Separation Pad Cassette 1 “Removing the Cas-
sette 1 Separation -
Pad” on page 118
[8] Cassette 2 Feed Roller Cassette Unit Cassette Unit is installed at the
-
time
[9] Cassette 2 Separation Roller Cassette Unit Cassette Unit is installed at the
-
time

84
4. Disassembly/Assembly

Clutch / Solenoid

CL203

CL202

CL201

CL501

SL202

SL501
SL201

No. Name Constitution Unit Remarks


CL201 Multi-purpose Tray Feed Clutch Multi-purpose Tray Unit -

85
4. Disassembly/Assembly

No. Name Constitution Unit Remarks


CL202 Cassette Feed Clutch Main Drive Unit -
CL203 Registration Clutch Main Drive Unit -
CL501 Cassette Drive Clutch Cassette Unit Cassette Unit is installed at the time
SL201 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Solenoid Multi-purpose Tray Unit -
SL202 Cassette 1 Pickup Solenoid Main Unit -
SL501 Cassette 2 Pickup Solenoid Cassette Unit Cassette Unit is installed at the time

Motor

M301

M201

M202

M502
M203

M501

No. Name Constitution Unit Remarks


M201 Fixing Motor Fixing Unit -
M202 Main Motor Main Drive Unit -
M203 Polygon Motor Laser Scanner Unit -
M501 Duplex Motor Duplex Unit Duplex Unit is installed at the time
M502 Reverse Motor Duplex Unit Duplex Unit is installed at the time
M301 Reader Motor Reader Unit -

86
4. Disassembly/Assembly

FAN

FM1

No. Name Constitution Unit


FM1 Fixing Cooling Fan Left Cover Unit

Heater / Others

SW100

SW1

SW2

SW501

87
4. Disassembly/Assembly

TP1

[3]

H1/H2

H6

TH1 H7
TH2

[1]

[2]

No. Name Constitution Unit Reference Remarks


SW1 Power Switch Main Unit - -
SW2 Left Cover Switch Main Unit - -
SW501 Cassette 2 Size Detec- Cassette Unit Cassette Unit is installed at
-
tion Switch the time
SW100 Cassette Heater Main Unit Cassette Unit is installed at
-
Switch the time
[1] Fixing Film Unit Fixing Assembly “Removing the Fixing Film Unit” on page
-
114
[2] Pressure Roller Fixing Assembly “Removing the Pressure Roller” on page
-
115
[3] Developing Cylinder Developing Assembly “Removing the Developing Cylinder” on
-
page 111
H1/H2 Fixing Heater/Fixing Fixing Assembly
- -
Sub Heater
H6 Cassette 1 Heater Main Unit Cassette Heater is installed
-
at the time
H7 Cassette 2 Heater Cassette Unit Cassette Unit isinstalled at
the time
-
Cassette Heater is installed
at the time
TP1 Thermo Switch Fixing Assembly - -
TH1 Fixing Main Thermistor Fixing Assembly - -
TH2 Fixing Sub Thermistor Fixing Assembly - -

88
4. Disassembly/Assembly

Sensor

SR402

SR401

SR212 HU1
SR203
SR202
SR201
SR204

SR207
SR206

SR205

SR503

SR210
SR502
SR501
SR211

No. Name Constitution Unit Remarks


SR201 Fixing Delivery Sensor Fixing Assembly -
SR202 Fixing Pressure Release Sensor Main Unit -
SR203 Delivery Sensor Main Unit Only as for the network model
SR204 Waste Toner Full Sensor Main Unit -
SR205 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor Main Unit -
SR206 Large Sensor Main Unit -
SR207 Pre-registration Sensor Main Unit -
SR210 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor Multi-purpose Tray Unit -
SR211 Arch Sensor Transfer Unit -
SR212 Delivery Full Sensor Main Unit Only as for the network FAX model
SR401 Copyboard Cover open/closed Sensor Reader Unit ADF is installed at the time
SR402 Contact Sensor HP Sensor Reader Unit -
SR501 Cassette 2 Paper Sensor Cassette Unit Cassette Unit is installed at the time
SR502 Cassette 2 Pickup Sensor Cassette Unit Cassette Unit is installed at the time
SR503 Duplex Feed Sensor Duplex Unit Duplex Unit is installed at the time
HU1 Environment Sensor Main Unit -

89
4. Disassembly/Assembly

PCB
PCB9
PCB8 PCB1

PCB4

PCB5
PCB7

PCB2

PCB3

PCB6

No. Name Constitution Reference Remarks


Unit
PCB1 Controller PCB Main Unit “Removing the Controller
-
PCB” on page 102
PCB2 Power Supply PCB Main Unit “Removing the Power Supply
-
PCB” on page 103
PCB3 HVT PCB Main Unit “Removing the HVT PCB” on
-
page 103
PCB4 Heater PCB Main Unit Heater PCB is installed at
-
the time
PCB5 Duplex PCB Duplex Unit Duplex Unit is installed at the
-
time
PCB6 1-Cassette Controller PCB Cassette Unit Cassette Unit is installed at
-
the time
PCB7 Control Panel PCB Control Panel “Removing the Control Panel
-
Unit Unit” on page 94
PCB8 FAX PCB Main Unit “Removing the FAX Unit” on Only as for the network FAX
page 107 model
PCB9 Wi-Fi PCB Main Unit - Only as for the network mod-
el

90
4. Disassembly/Assembly

External / Internal Cover Removing the Rear Cover


■ Procedure
Removing the Front Cover
1. Remove the Rear Cover.
■ Procedure • 4 Screws
• 5 Bosses
1. Draw out the cassette. • 2 Hooks

2. Open the Front Cover. Hook

4x

Boss

Boss

3. Remove the Front Cover.


Removing the Left Cover Unit
• 2 Bosses
■ Preparation
NOTE: 1. Removing the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear
When removing the Front Cover use a flat-blade Cover” on page 91
screwdriver.

■ Procedure
Boss 1. Remove the harness of the Left Cover Unit.
• 1 Wire Saddle
• 2 Reuse band
• 2 Connectors

91
4. Disassembly/Assembly

3x

2x

NOTE:
If the Duplex Unit is not equipped with.
• 1 Reuse band
• 1 Connector

1x

1x

1x

CAUTION:
Remove the 1 pin with holding the Left Cover Unit.

2. Open the Left Cover Unit. Removing the Reader Rear


3. Remove the Left Cover Unit.
Cover
• 1 Pin
■ Preparation
1. Remove the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear Cover”
on page 91

■ Procedure
1. Open the ADF or Platen Cover.

2. Remove the Reader Rear Cover.


• 2 Claws

92
4. Disassembly/Assembly

Removing the Right Cover


2x
■ Preparation
1. Remove the Rear Cover“Removing the Rear Cover”
on page 91
Claw
2. Remove the Reader Rear Cover.“Removing the
Reader Rear Cover” on page 92

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Right Cover.
• 1 Screw
• 5 Bosses
• 2 Hooks

1x
Hook

NOTE:
1. When removing the Reader Rear Cover use a Boss
flatblade screwdriver.
Boss
2. If the ADF is installed, loosen the ADF connection line
bundle.
• 1 Harness Guide

1x

Removing the Reader Front


Cover
■ Procedure
1. Open the Left Cover Unit.

2. Remove the Reader Front Cover.


• 2 Screws
• 3 Claws

93
4. Disassembly/Assembly

Removing the Control Panel


Unit
2x Hook
■ Preparation
1. Remove the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear Cover”
3x on page 91
Hook
2. Remove the Reader Rear Cover.“Removing the
Reader Rear Cover” on page 92

3. Remove the Right Cover.“Removing the Right


Cover” on page 93

4. Remove the Reader Front Cover.“Removing the


Reader Front Cover” on page 93

■ Procedure
1. Open the Front Cover.

2. Remove the Control Panel Unit.


• 1 Screw
Hook • 7 Claws
• 5 Hooks

1x 7x

Hook

Hook
NOTE:
When removing the Reader Front Cover use a flat-blade
screwdriver.

Removing the Cassette 1


■ Procedure
Claw
1. Remove the cassette 1.

NOTE:
When removing the Control Panel Unit use a flat-blade
screwdriver.

3. Turn the Control Panel Unit and remove the Flexible


Cable.

94
4. Disassembly/Assembly

■ Procedure
1x 1. Remove the Right Front Cover.
• 4 Bosses

■ Adjustment when Replacing the


Boss
Parts
1. Execute the service mode.
• COPIER > ADJUST > PANEL > TOUCHCHK Removing the Delivery Tray
2. Touch the "+ (plus)" mark displayed on the Touch
Panel with something with a sharp tip such as a pen.
Cover
■ Preparation
Removing the Right Front
1. Remove the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear Cover”
Cover on page 91

2. Remove the Reader Rear Cover.“Removing the


■ Preparation Reader Rear Cover” on page 92

1. Remove the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear Cover” 3. Remove the Right Cover.“Removing the Right
on page 91 Cover” on page 93

2. Remove the Reader Rear Cover.“Removing the 4. Remove the Reader Front Cover.“Removing the
Reader Rear Cover” on page 92 Reader Front Cover” on page 93

3. Remove the Right Cover.“Removing the Right 5. Remove the Control Panel Unit.“Removing the
Cover” on page 93 Control Panel Unit” on page 94

4. Remove the Reader Front Cover.“Removing the


Reader Front Cover” on page 93

5. Remove the Front Cover.“Removing the Front


Cover” on page 91

6. Remove the Control Panel Unit.“Removing the


Control Panel Unit” on page 94

95
4. Disassembly/Assembly

■ Procedure Removing the Left Front Cover


1. Put away the Flexible Cable in the Delivery Tray
Cover. ■ Preparation
1. Remove the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear Cover”
on page 91

2. Remove the Reader Rear Cover.“Removing the


Reader Rear Cover” on page 92

3. Remove the Right Cover.“Removing the Right


Cover” on page 93

4. Remove the Reader Front Cover.“Removing the


Reader Front Cover” on page 93

5. Remove the cassette 1.“Removing the Cassette 1”


on page 94

6. Remove the Front Cover.“Removing the Front


Cover” on page 91

7. Remove the Control Panel Unit.“Removing the


Control Panel Unit” on page 94

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Left Front Cover.
• 2 Screws
• 4 Claws
• 2 Bosses

2x 4x
2. Remove the Delivery Tray Cover.
• 1 Screw
• 3 Bosses

Boss
1x

Boss

Claw

Removing the Front Inner


Boss
Cover
■ Preparation
1. Remove the Drum Unit.“Removing the Drum Unit”
on page 110

CAUTION:
Put the Flexible Cable and the Delivery Hold Plate
aside during installation of the Delivery Tray Cover.

96
4. Disassembly/Assembly

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Developing Assembly pressure release
lever.
• 1 Screw

1x

2. Remove the Front Inner Cover.


• 3 Claws

3x

Claw

97
4. Disassembly/Assembly

Original Exposure
2x 1x

Removing the CIS Unit Claw

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Rear Cover“Removing the Rear Cover”
on page 91

2. Remove the Reader Rear Cover.“Removing the


Reader Rear Cover” on page 92

3. Remove the Reader Upper Unit.“Removing the


Reader Upper Unit” on page 99

■ Procedure CAUTION:
When installing, the flexible portion of the Flexible
Cable is on the left side of the CIS.
CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the CIS sensor when
disassembling/assembling the CIS unit.

1. Remove the CIS Unit.


• 2 Claws
• 1 Flexible Cable

■ Adjustment when Replacing the


Parts
Proceed the following adjustment at the CIS unit
replacement.

● Automatic gain offset adjustment for the


CIS unit
1. Execute the service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CCD-ADJ
Contact sensor output is adjusted and parameter
is set automatically.

● Adjusting the White Level

CAUTION:
Proceed the adjustment when ADF is equipped.

98
4. Disassembly/Assembly

NOTE: Removing the Reader Upper


1. This is a item of adjustment in which the white level
of images made in stream reading mode are matched Unit
with the white level of images made in copyboard
cover mode. If you omit this adjustment, the following
will likely occur: CAUTION:
• Inappropriate reproduction of background When removing the Reader Upper Unit, take care not
density in images made in stream reading mode. to touch the glass surface.
• Wrong speck detection in stream reading mode. Attached soiling may cause white line/black line in the
2. "DF-WLVL1" and "DF-WLVL2" are used for the images.
monochrome, and "DF-WLVL3" and "DF-WLVL4" If soiling is attached, clean it with lint free paper.
are used for the color.

1. Place the white copy paper which the user usually


uses on the copyboard glass and then close the
DADF.

2. Execute the service mode.


• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1

3. Remove the paper from the copyboard glass and


place it onto the DADF.

4. Execute the service mode.


• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2

5. Perform a test copy.


• In case that the faulty image appears, re-execute ■ Preparation
above steps from 1) to 4).
1. Remove the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear Cover”
6. Place the white copy paper which the user usually on page 91
uses on the copyboard glass and then close the
DADF. 2. Remove the Reader Rear Cover.“Removing the
Reader Rear Cover” on page 92
7. Execute the service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3 ■ Procedure
8. Remove the paper from the copyboard glass and
1. Remove the ADF or Platen Cover.
place it onto the DADF.
2. Remove the Reader Upper Unit.
9. Execute the service mode.
• 2 Screws
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4
• 7 Claws
10. Perform a test copy.
• In case that the faulty image appears, re-execute
above steps from 6) to 9). 2x 7x

Claw

Claw

Claw
Claw

99
4. Disassembly/Assembly

■ Adjustment when Replacing the 5. Perform a test copy.


• In case that the faulty image appears, re-execute
Parts above steps from 1) to 4).

● Enter the value of bar code. 6. Place the white copy paper which the user usually
uses on the copyboard glass and then close the
DADF.
CAUTION:
Be sure to make the white plate data adjustment before 7. Execute the service mode.
ADF white level adjustment. • COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3

8. Remove the paper from the copyboard glass and


1. Enter the value on the service mode, which is printed place it onto the DADF.
on the reader upper unit.
9. Execute the service mode.
• COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X/Y/
Z(whiteplate data) • COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4

10. Perform a test copy.


• In case that the faulty image appears, re-execute
above steps from 6) to 9).

W-PLT-X W-PLT-Z
W-PLT-Y
Removing the Reader Lower
Unit
■ Preparation
1. Remove the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear Cover”
on page 91

2. Remove the Reader Rear Cover.“Removing the


Reader Rear Cover” on page 92
● Adjusting the White Level 3. Remove the Reader Upper Unit.“Removing the
Reader Upper Unit” on page 99
CAUTION:
4. Remove the Reader Front Cover.“Removing the
Proceed the adjustment when ADF is equipped.
Reader Front Cover” on page 93

NOTE:
■ Procedure
1. This is a item of adjustment in which the white level
1. Remove the Reader Lower Unit.
of images made in stream reading mode are matched
with the white level of images made in copyboard • 3 Screws
cover mode. If you omit this adjustment, the following • 1 Flexible Cable
will likely occur: • 2 Connectors
• Inappropriate reproduction of background • 1 Edge Saddle
density in images made in stream reading mode.
• Wrong speck detection in stream reading mode.
2. "DF-WLVL1" and "DF-WLVL2" are used for the
monochrome, and "DF-WLVL3" and "DF-WLVL4"
are used for the color.

1. Place the white copy paper which the user usually


uses on the copyboard glass and then close the
DADF.

2. Execute the service mode.


• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1

3. Remove the paper from the copyboard glass and


place it onto the DADF.

4. Execute the service mode.


• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2

100
4. Disassembly/Assembly

3x 3x 1x 3x 3x 1x

Removing the Reader Unit


■ Preparation
1. Remove the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear Cover”
on page 91

2. Remove the Reader Rear Cover.“Removing the


Reader Rear Cover” on page 92

3. Remove the Reader Front Cover.“Removing the


Reader Front Cover” on page 93

■ Procedure
1. Remove the ADF or Platen Cover.

2. Remove the Reader Unit.


• 3 Screws
• 1 Flexible Cable
• 2 Connectors
• 1 Edge Saddle

101
4. Disassembly/Assembly

To set country group.


Main Controller COPIER > OPTION > BODY > LOCALE ( To set country
group.)
• 1 : Japan*
Removing the Controller PCB • 2 : North America
• 3 : Korea
• 4 : China
■ Preparation
• 5 : Taiwan
• 6 : Europe
CAUTION: • 7 : Asia
If a setting file exported by the user from remote UI is • 8 : Oceania
available, return the values to those before Setting range: 1 - 8 (Service part default value: 1)
replacement by importing the file after replacing the To set paper size groups
Main Controller. COPIER > OPTION > BODY > SIZE-LC ( to set paper size
groups)
• 1: AB series*
1. Remove the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear Cover”
• 2: Inch series
on page 91
Setting range:1, 2 (Service part default value : 1)
2. Remove the Reader Rear Cover.“Removing the Execute the following service mode to enable this setting.
Reader Rear Cover” on page 92 COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ALL

3. Remove the Right Cover.“Removing the Right


Cover” on page 93 CAUTION:
Ask the user to load the address book from remote UI.
4. Removing the FAX Unit“Removing the FAX Unit” on
page 107
● Input of the service label
■ Procedure 1. Enter the value for all printed on the service label,
which is labeled on the rear cover.
1. Remove the Controller PCB all Flexible Cable and
Connectors.

2. Remove the Controller PCB.


• 9 Screws

9x

2. Turn OFF/ON the main power.

● Automatic gain offset adjustment for the


CIS unit
1. Execute the service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CCD-ADJ
Contact sensor output is adjusted and parameter
is set automatically.

● Adjusting the White Level

CAUTION:
Proceed the adjustment when ADF is equipped.

■ Actions after Replacement


Carry out the following operation after having changed a
controller board.

102
4. Disassembly/Assembly

NOTE: ■ Procedure
1. This is a item of adjustment in which the white level
of images made in stream reading mode are matched 1. Remove the Power Supply PCB.
with the white level of images made in copyboard • 4 Connectors
cover mode. If you omit this adjustment, the following • 7 Screws
will likely occur:
• Inappropriate reproduction of background
density in images made in stream reading mode.
4x 7x
• Wrong speck detection in stream reading mode.
2. "DF-WLVL1" and "DF-WLVL2" are used for the
monochrome, and "DF-WLVL3" and "DF-WLVL4"
are used for the color.

1. Place the white copy paper which the user usually


uses on the copyboard glass and then close the
DADF.

2. Execute the service mode.


• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1

3. Remove the paper from the copyboard glass and


place it onto the DADF.

4. Execute the service mode. Removing the HVT PCB


• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2

5. Perform a test copy. ■ Preparation


• In case that the faulty image appears, re-execute
above steps from 1) to 4). 1. Remove the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear Cover”
on page 91
6. Place the white copy paper which the user usually
uses on the copyboard glass and then close the 2. Remove the Reader Rear Cover.“Removing the
DADF. Reader Rear Cover” on page 92

7. Execute the service mode. 3. Remove the Right Cover.“Removing the Right
Cover” on page 93
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3

8. Remove the paper from the copyboard glass and ■ Procedure


place it onto the DADF.
1. Remove the HVT PCB.
9. Execute the service mode.
• 1 Flexible Cable
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4
• 3 Screws
10. Perform a test copy.
• In case that the faulty image appears, re-execute
above steps from 6) to 9). 1x 3x

Removing the Power Supply


PCB
■ Preparation
1. Remove the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear Cover”
on page 91

2. Remove the Reader Rear Cover.“Removing the


Reader Rear Cover” on page 92

3. Remove the Right Cover.“Removing the Right


Cover” on page 93

103
4. Disassembly/Assembly

4. Remove the Connector.


Removing the Fixing Cooling
Fan
1x
■ If the Duplex Unit is not equipped
with
● Procedure
1. Open the Left Cover Unit. Connector

2. Remove the Delivery Guide.


• 4 Screws

4x

5. Remove the Duct.


• 2 Claws

3. Remove the Fan Harness Cover. 2x


• 3 Claws

3x

Claw

&ODZ 6. Remove the Fan.


• 2 Claws

104
4. Disassembly/Assembly

2x Claw 2x

CAUTION:
Arrows on the fan and the duct must be pointed same
direction for replacement.

2. Remove the Duplex Unit.


• 4 Screws

4x

■ If the Duplex Unit is equipped with


● Preparation
1. Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
Cover Unit” on page 91

● Procedure
1. Remove the Harness.
3. Remove the Fan Harness Cover.
• 1 Wire Saddle
• 1 Harness Guide • 3 Claws

105
4. Disassembly/Assembly

3x 2x
Claw

Claw

6. Remove the Fan.


• 2 Claws

2x Claw

4. Remove the Connector.

1x

Connector
CAUTION:
Arrows on the fan and the duct must be pointed same
direction for replacement.

5. Remove the Duct.


• 2 Claws

106
4. Disassembly/Assembly

Removing the FAX Unit


■ Preparation
1. Remove the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear Cover”
on page 91
2x
■ Procedure
1. Loosen 4 Screws and remove the FAX Unit.
• 1 Wire Saddle
• 3 Connectors

1x 3x 4x

2. Remove the PCB.


• 7 Screws
• 3 Connectors
• 1 Claw

7x 3x 1x

Removing the Control Panel


■ Preparation
1. Remove the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear Cover”
on page 91

2. Remove the Reader Rear Cover.“Removing the


Reader Rear Cover” on page 92

3. Remove the Right Cover.“Removing the Right Claw


Cover” on page 93

4. Remove the Reader Front Cover.“Removing the


3. Remove the panel cover.
Reader Front Cover” on page 93
• 2 Screws
5. Remove the Control Panel Unit.“Removing the • 2 Bosses
Control Panel Unit” on page 94

■ Procedure
1. Remove the PCB retainer and plate.
• 2 Screws
• 1 Spring

107
4. Disassembly/Assembly

2x Boss

4. Remove the Control Panel

■ Adjustment when Replacing the


Parts
1. Execute the service mode.
• COPIER > ADJUST > PANEL > TOUCHCHK

2. Touch the "+ (plus)" mark displayed on the Touch


Panel with something with a sharp tip such as a pen.

108
4. Disassembly/Assembly

Laser Exposure System


2x

Removing the Laser Scanner


Unit 4x

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear Cover”
on page 91

2. Remove the Reader Rear Cover.“Removing the


Reader Rear Cover” on page 92

3. Remove the Right Cover.“Removing the Right


Cover” on page 93

4. Remove the Reader Front Cover.“Removing the


Reader Front Cover” on page 93

5. Remove the Control Panel Unit.“Removing the


Control Panel Unit” on page 94

6. Remove the Delivery Tray Cover.“Removing the


Delivery Tray Cover” on page 95

7. Remove the Reader Unit.“Removing the Reader


Unit” on page 101

■ Procedure

CAUTION:
Be sure not to disassemble the Laser Scanner Unit
because it requires adjustment.

1. Remove the Laser Scanner Unit.


• 1 Sponge
• 1 Connector
• 1 Flexible Cable
• 4 Screws

109
4. Disassembly/Assembly

1. Turn on the main power switch.


Image Formation System
2. Clear the parts counter.
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > PT-DRM
Removing the Toner Cartridge 3. Press the counter key on the operation panel to
check the total count.
■ Procedure 4. Write the date and counter value in the Counter
1. Open the Front Cover. Label.

2. Press and hold the knob of the Toner Cartridge and


remove by turning in the direction of the arrow.

5. Affix the Counter Label to the Drum Unit.

Removing the Drum Unit


■ Procedure
1. Open the Front Cover.
Removing the Developing
2. Open the Left Cover Unit. Assembly
3. Loosen the thumb screw. ■ Preparation
4. Release the lock and remove the Drum unit.
1. Remove the Toner Cartridge.“Removing the Toner
Cartridge” on page 110
1x 2. Remove the Front Inner Cover.“Removing the Front
Inner Cover” on page 96

■ Procedure

CAUTION:
Do not touch nor give a shock to the Developing
Cylinder when disassembling/ assembling.

■ Adjustment when Replacing the


Parts
When installing a new Drum Unit, be sure to perform the
following steps.

110
4. Disassembly/Assembly

1. Remove the Developing Assembly. 1. Remove the Holder.


• 3 Screws

3x

2. Remove the Electrode Plate and Gear.

■ Adjustment when Replacing the


Parts
1. Clear the parts counter.
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > DV-UNT-K

Removing the Developing 3. Remove the Positioning guide.


• 1 Screw
Cylinder
■ Preparation 1x

1. Remove the Developing Assembly.“Removing the


Developing Assembly” on page 110

■ Procedure

CAUTION:
Do not touch nor give a shock to the Developing
Cylinder when disassembling/ assembling.

4. Remove the two Bearing.


• 4 Screws

111
4. Disassembly/Assembly

2. Lift the Transfer Roller and remove the bearing.

4x

5. Remove the two Rollers and Developing Cylinder.

Removing the Transfer Roller


■ Procedure 3. Remove the Transfer Roller.

CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the surface of the Transfer Roller
when disassembling/assembling.

■ Adjustment when Replacing the


Parts
1. Clear the parts counter.
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > TR-ROLL

1. Open the Left Cover Unit.

112
4. Disassembly/Assembly

3. Remove the Fixing Positioning Guide.


Fixing System • 4 Screws

Removing the Fixing 4x


Assembly

CAUTION:
The Fixing Assembly may cause burn injury. Be sure
to perform the operation after the unit is surely cooled.

■ Preparation
1. Removing the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear
Cover” on page 91

2. Remove the Reader Front Cover.“Removing the


Reader Front Cover” on page 93

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Heater Harness Cover and pull out
Connector.
• 1 Boss
• 1 Connector

Boss

4. Remove the Fixing Assembly.


• 4 Wire Saddles
• 3 Connectors
• 2 Screws

1x

2. Remove the Screw[A].


• 1 Screw

113
4. Disassembly/Assembly

■ Procedure
4x 3x 2x
CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the surface of the Fixing Film Unit
when disassembling/ assembling.

1. Remove the Guide Cover.


• 2 Wire Saddles
• 3 Claws

■ Adjustment when Replacing the 2x 3x


Parts
1. Clear the parts counter. Hook

• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-UNIT

Removing the Fixing Film Unit


■ Preparation
1. Removing the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear
Cover” on page 91

2. Remove the Reader Front Cover.“Removing the


Reader Front Cover” on page 93

3. Remove the Fixing Assembly.“Removing the Fixing 2. Remove the Guide.


Assembly” on page 113 • 1 Screw
• 2 Claws

114
4. Disassembly/Assembly

5. Remove the Harness.

1x
Claw 1x

2x

3. Remove the Fixing Delivery Paper Guide.


• 1 Claw
6. Remove the Fixing Film Unit.

1x

Hook

4. Open the Plate.


• 4 Screws
Removing the Pressure Roller
4x ■ Preparation
1. Remove the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear Cover”
on page 91

2. Remove the Reader Front Cover.“Removing the


Reader Front Cover” on page 93

3. Remove the Fixing Assembly.“Removing the Fixing


Assembly” on page 113

4. Remove the Fixing Film Unit.“Removing the Fixing


Film Unit” on page 114

115
4. Disassembly/Assembly

■ Procedure

CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the surface of the Pressure Roller
when disassembling/ assembling.

1. Remove the Pressure Roller.

2. Remove the Gear and Bearing.


• 1 E-ring
• 2 Bearings

116
4. Disassembly/Assembly

Pickup/Feed System
2x

Removing the Multi-purpose


Tray Pickup Roller
■ Procedure

CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the surface of the Roller when
disassembling/assembling.

4. Lower the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad, and


remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller.

1. Open the Left Cover Unit.

2. Remove the Feed Guide.


• 2 Screws
NOTE:
Mounting direction.
2x • Left Shaft Long
• Right Shaft Short

3. Remove the Bearing.


• 2 Claws

117
4. Disassembly/Assembly

■ Adjustment when Replacing the


Parts 2x

1. Clear the parts counter.


• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > M-PU-RL

Removing the Multi-purpose


Tray Separation Pad
■ Preparation
1. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller.
“Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller”
on page 117

■ Procedure CAUTION:
When assembling the Multi-purpose Tray Separation
Pad, press the pat firmly and check it does not come
CAUTION:
off.
Be sure not to touch the surface of the Pad when
disassembling/assembling.

■ Adjustment when Replacing the


Parts
1. Clear the parts counter.
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > M-SP-PD

Removing the Cassette 1


Separation Pad
■ Preparation
1. Remove the Cassette 1.“Removing the Cassette 1”
on page 94

■ Procedure
NOTE:
When removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad CAUTION:
use a flat-blade screwdriver. Be sure not to touch the surface of the Pad when
disassembling/assembling.

1. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad.


• 2 Claws

118
4. Disassembly/Assembly

1. Remove the Cassette 1 Separation Pad. ■ Procedure


• 2 Claws

CAUTION:
NOTE: Be sure not to touch the surface of the Roller when
When removing the Cassette 1 Separation Pad use a flat-
disassembling/assembling.
blade screwdriver.

2x

1. Open the Left Cover Unit.

2. Open the Cassette 1 Left Cover.

■ Adjustment when Replacing the


Parts
3. Remove the Bearing.
1. Clear the parts counter.
• 1 Claw
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C1-SP-RL

1x
Removing the Cassette 1
Pickup Roller
■ Preparation
1. Remove the Cassette 1.“Removing the Cassette 1”
on page 94

119
4. Disassembly/Assembly

4. Remove the Cassette 1 Pickup Roller.


Removing the Cassette 1 Feed
Roller
■ Procedure

CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the surface of the Roller when
disassembling/assembling.

NOTE:
Make sure that the claw of the Cassette 1 Pickup Roller is
located on the right side of the Cassette 1 Pickup Roller.

1. Open the Left Cover Unit.

2. Open the Cassette 1 Left Cover.

Claw

■ Adjustment when Replacing the


Parts 3. Remove the Bearing.
• 1 Claw
1. Clear the parts counter.
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C1-PU-RL

120
4. Disassembly/Assembly

NOTE: Removing the Main Drive Unit


When removing the Cassette 1 Feed Roller use a flat-
blade screwdriver.
■ Preparation
1. Removing the Rear Cover.“Removing the Rear
Cover” on page 91
1x
2. Remove the Drum Unit.“Removing the Drum Unit”
on page 110

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Spring.

2. Remove the MP Drive Unit.

4. Remove the Cassette 1 Feed Roller.

NOTE:
Mounting direction.
• Left Shaft Long
• Right Shaft Short

CAUTION:
Make sure that the MP Drive Unit Gear is engaged with
the Main Drive Unit Gear.

121
4. Disassembly/Assembly

3. Remove the 5 Connectors.

5x

%RVV

5. Remove the Main Drive Unit.


• 5 Screws

NOTE: 5x
If the Duplex Unit not is equipped with.
• 4 Connectors

4x

Removing the Registration


4. Loosen the Harness Guide. Roller
• 1 Boss
■ Preparation
1. Remove the Main Drive Unit.“Removing the Main
Drive Unit” on page 121

122
4. Disassembly/Assembly

■ Procedure 2. Slide the shaft backward, and remove the coupling.

CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the surface of the Roller when
disassembling/assembling.

1. Remove the 2 E-ring.

3. Remove the Registration Roller.

4. Remove the Bearing.

123
5 Adjustment
Overview........................................... 125
Basic Adjustment.............................. 126
Adjustment when Replacing the Parts
.......................................................129
5. Adjustment

Overview

Basic Adjustment
Basic Adjustments are described as below.

Category Adjustment Reference


Image Adjustment Leading Edge Margin “Leading Edge Margin Adjustment” on page
126
Left Edge Margin “Left Edge Margin” on page 127

Adjustment when Replacing the Parts


Adjustment required in the field service works when parts are replaced is described as below.
The parts are classified by 2 function blocks.

Category Replacing parts Reference


Original Exposure System CIS Unit “CIS Unit” on page 129
Reader Upper Unit “Reader Upper Unit” on page 129
Controller Controller PCB “Controller PCB” on page 131

125
5. Adjustment

Basic Adjustment

Printer
■ Image Position Adjustment
● Outline
Copy 10 sheets from each pickup position to check that the image margin area is within the standard.
• Cassette 1/2
• Multi-purpose tray
Adjust it following instruction when it is out of standard.

CAUTION:
Write the setting value on the service label when it is changed on the service mode.

● Leading Edge Margin Adjustment

NOTE:
The adjustment of the leading edge margin for the image which is fed from the cassette 1 also leads same adjustment to the image
from the cassette 2 and multi-purpose tray.

Print out from the cassette 1 and check that L1 (leading edge margin) is within 3.0 ± 1.5mm.
Adjust it following instruction when it is out of standard.

L1

Feeding direction

of paper
image

1. Adjust the image position on the service mode.


• COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > PVE-OFST

NOTE:
< Adjusting Range >
-28 to +32 (0.1mm per 1unit)
As the value is incremented by 1, the L1 (leading edge margin) increases 0.1 mm.

2. Write the setting value on the service label when the image position is adjusted on the procedure 1.

3. Exit the service mode.

4. Print out from the cassette 1 and check that L1 (leading edge margin) is within 3.0 ± 1.5mm.

126
5. Adjustment

● Left Edge Margin


Left Edge Margin Adjustment (Front Side)
Print out from the cassette 1/2 and the multi-purpose tray and check that L1 (left edge margin (front side)) is within 3.0 ± 2.0mm.
Adjust it following instruction when it is out of standard.

Feeding direction

of paper
image

L1

1. Adjust the image position on the service mode.


• Cassette 1: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C1
• Cassette 2: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C2
• Multi-purpose tray: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-MF

NOTE:
< Adjusting Range >
-12 to +12 (0.5mm per 1unit)
As the value is incremented by 1, the L1 (left edge margin) increases 0.5 mm.

2. Write the setting value on the service label when the image position is adjusted on the procedure 1.

3. Exit the service mode.

4. Print out from the cassette 1/2 and the multi-purpose tray. Check that L1 (left edge margin (front side)) is within 3.0
± 2.0mm.

Left Edge Margin Adjustment (Reverse Side)

NOTE:
The adjustment of the left edge margin (reverse side) for the image which is fed from the cassette 2 also leads same adjustment
to the image from the cassette 1 and multipurpose tray.

Print out the double-sided from the cassette 1 and check that L1 (left edge margin (reverse side)) is within 3.0 ± 2.0mm. Adjust
it following instruction when it is out of standard.

Feeding direction

of paper
image
L1

127
5. Adjustment

1. Adjust the image position on the service mode.


• COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-REFE

NOTE:
< Adjusting Range >
-12 to +12 (0.5mm per 1unit)
As the value is incremented by 1, the L1 (left edge margin (reverse side)) increases 0.5 mm.

2. Write the setting value on the service label when the image position is adjusted on the procedure 1.

3. Exit the service mode.

4. Print out the double-sided from the cassette 1 and check that L1 (left edge margin (reverse side)) is within 3.0 ±
2.0mm.

128
5. Adjustment

Adjustment when Replacing the Parts

Original Exposure
■ CIS Unit
● Procedure of parts replacement
Refer to“Removing the CIS Unit” on page 98

● Adjustment when Replacing the Parts


Proceed the following adjustment at the CIS unit replacement.

Automatic gain offset adjustment for the CIS unit

1. Execute the service mode.


• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CCD-ADJ
Contact sensor output is adjusted and parameter is set automatically.

Adjusting the White Level

CAUTION:
Proceed the adjustment when ADF is equipped.

NOTE:
1. This is a item of adjustment in which the white level of images made in stream reading mode are matched with the white level
of images made in copyboard cover mode. If you omit this adjustment, the following will likely occur:
• Inappropriate reproduction of background density in images made in stream reading mode.
• Wrong speck detection in stream reading mode.
2. "DF-WLVL1" and "DF-WLVL2" are used for the monochrome, and "DF-WLVL3" and "DF-WLVL4" are used for the color.

1. Place the white copy paper which the user usually uses on the copyboard glass and then close the DADF.

2. Execute the service mode.


• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1

3. Remove the paper from the copyboard glass and place it onto the DADF.

4. Execute the service mode.


• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2

5. Perform a test copy.


• In case that the faulty image appears, re-execute above steps from 1) to 4).

6. Place the white copy paper which the user usually uses on the copyboard glass and then close the DADF.

7. Execute the service mode.


• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3

8. Remove the paper from the copyboard glass and place it onto the DADF.

9. Execute the service mode.


• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4

10. Perform a test copy.


• In case that the faulty image appears, re-execute above steps from 6) to 9).

■ Reader Upper Unit


● Procedure of parts replacement
Refer to“Removing the Reader Upper Unit” on page 99

129
5. Adjustment

● Adjustment when Replacing the Parts


Enter the value of bar code.

CAUTION:
Be sure to make the white plate data adjustment before ADF white level adjustment.

1. Enter the value on the service mode, which is printed on the reader upper unit.
• COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X/Y/Z(whiteplate data)

W-PLT-X W-PLT-Z
W-PLT-Y

Adjusting the White Level

CAUTION:
Proceed the adjustment when ADF is equipped.

NOTE:
1. This is a item of adjustment in which the white level of images made in stream reading mode are matched with the white level
of images made in copyboard cover mode. If you omit this adjustment, the following will likely occur:
• Inappropriate reproduction of background density in images made in stream reading mode.
• Wrong speck detection in stream reading mode.
2. "DF-WLVL1" and "DF-WLVL2" are used for the monochrome, and "DF-WLVL3" and "DF-WLVL4" are used for the color.

1. Place the white copy paper which the user usually uses on the copyboard glass and then close the DADF.

2. Execute the service mode.


• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1

3. Remove the paper from the copyboard glass and place it onto the DADF.

4. Execute the service mode.


• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2

5. Perform a test copy.


• In case that the faulty image appears, re-execute above steps from 1) to 4).

6. Place the white copy paper which the user usually uses on the copyboard glass and then close the DADF.

7. Execute the service mode.


• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3

8. Remove the paper from the copyboard glass and place it onto the DADF.

9. Execute the service mode.


• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4

10. Perform a test copy.


• In case that the faulty image appears, re-execute above steps from 6) to 9).

130
5. Adjustment

Main Controller
■ Controller PCB
● Procedure of parts replacement
Refer to“Removing the Controller PCB” on page 102

● Actions after Replacement


Carry out the following operation after having changed a controller board.
To set country group.
COPIER > OPTION > BODY > LOCALE ( To set country group.)
• 1 : Japan*
• 2 : North America
• 3 : Korea
• 4 : China
• 5 : Taiwan
• 6 : Europe
• 7 : Asia
• 8 : Oceania
Setting range: 1 - 8 (Service part default value: 1)
To set paper size groups
COPIER > OPTION > BODY > SIZE-LC ( to set paper size groups)
• 1: AB series*
• 2: Inch series
Setting range:1, 2 (Service part default value : 1)
Execute the following service mode to enable this setting.
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ALL

CAUTION:
Ask the user to load the address book from remote UI.

Input of the service label

1. Enter the value for all printed on the service label, which is labeled on the rear cover.

2. Turn OFF/ON the main power.

Automatic gain offset adjustment for the CIS unit

1. Execute the service mode.


• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CCD-ADJ
Contact sensor output is adjusted and parameter is set automatically.

Adjusting the White Level

CAUTION:
Proceed the adjustment when ADF is equipped.

131
5. Adjustment

NOTE:
1. This is a item of adjustment in which the white level of images made in stream reading mode are matched with the white level
of images made in copyboard cover mode. If you omit this adjustment, the following will likely occur:
• Inappropriate reproduction of background density in images made in stream reading mode.
• Wrong speck detection in stream reading mode.
2. "DF-WLVL1" and "DF-WLVL2" are used for the monochrome, and "DF-WLVL3" and "DF-WLVL4" are used for the color.

1. Place the white copy paper which the user usually uses on the copyboard glass and then close the DADF.

2. Execute the service mode.


• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1

3. Remove the paper from the copyboard glass and place it onto the DADF.

4. Execute the service mode.


• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2

5. Perform a test copy.


• In case that the faulty image appears, re-execute above steps from 1) to 4).

6. Place the white copy paper which the user usually uses on the copyboard glass and then close the DADF.

7. Execute the service mode.


• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3

8. Remove the paper from the copyboard glass and place it onto the DADF.

9. Execute the service mode.


• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4

10. Perform a test copy.


• In case that the faulty image appears, re-execute above steps from 6) to 9).

■ Control Panel(Control Panel Unit)


● Procedure of parts replacement
Refer to “Removing the Control Panel” on page 107

● Adjustment when Replacing the Parts


1. Execute the service mode.
• COPIER > ADJUST > PANEL > TOUCHCHK

2. Touch the "+ (plus)" mark displayed on the Touch Panel with something with a sharp tip such as a pen.

132
6 Troubleshooting
Initial Check.......................................134
Test Print...........................................135
Troubleshooting Items.......................138
Version Upgrade............................... 144
Log Collector..................................... 148
6. Troubleshooting

Initial Check

List of Initial Check Items


Item No. Detail Check
Site Environment 1 The voltage of the power supply is as rated (±10%).
2 The site is not a high temperature / humidity environment (near a
water faucet, water boiler, humidifi er), and it is not in a cold place.
The machine is not near a source of fire or dust.
3 The site is not subject to ammonium gas.
4 The site is not exposed to direct rays of the sun. (Otherwise, provide
curtains.)
5 The site is well ventilated, and the floor keeps the machine level.
6 The machine's power plug remains connected to the power outlet.
Checking the Paper 7 The paper is of a recommended type.
8 The paper is not moist. Try paper fresh out of package.
Checking the Placement of Pa- 9 Check the cassette and the manual feed tray to see if the paper is
per not in excess of a specific level.
10 If a transparency is used, check to make sure that it is placed in the
correct orientation in the manual feed tray.
Checking the Durables 11 Check the table of durables to see if any has reached the end of its
life.
Checking the Periodically Re- 12 Check the scheduled servicing table and the periodically replaced
placed Parts parts table, and replace any part that has reached the time of re-
placement.

134
6. Troubleshooting

Test Print

Overview
This machine have the following test print TYPE and you can judge the image failure that is checked as “Yes” in the following
image check items with each test print. These test print image is generated by Controller PCB. If the image failure occurred on
normal output does not reappear on the test print, it may be caused by the PDL input or reader side.

PG- Test print image Items


TYPE Fogging Trans- Black White Uneven Uneven Right An- Straight
fer line line Pitch Density gle Lines
Fault
0 Grid Bk Yes Yes
1 Halftone Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
2 Solid black Yes Yes Yes Yes
3 Solid white Yes Yes
4 Solid black / Solid white Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
5 2 dot 2 space (Length) Yes
6 2 dot 2 space (Side) Yes Yes Yes
7 For R&D
8 For R&D

Steps to Select the Test Print TYPE


1. Enter the service mode.
• TESTMODE > PRINT
2. Select PG-TYPE/COUNT/PHASE/DENS/FEED and press start.

How to Check Test Print


■ Grid(TYPE 0)

Check item Check method Assumed cause


Right angle accuracy/ Check whether lines in the horizontal/ vertical scan- Feed system failure or Laser Scanner
Straight line accuracy ning directions are paralleled to the paper and these Unit failure is considered.
lines are at right angles to one another.

135
6. Troubleshooting

■ Halftone(TYPE 1)

NOTE:
• When changing the density of the test print, use the following service mode to change the density:
TESTMODE > PRINT > DENS

Check item Check method Assumed cause


Transfer failure Check that the transfer failure does not appear on entire im- Transfer system failure is considered.
age.
Black line Check whether black lines appear on the image. Laser light path failure, developing system
failure or cleaning (drum) failure is consid-
ered.
White line Check whether white lines appear on the image. Developing system failure is considered.
Uneven pitch Check whether lines appear on the image in the horizontal Drum failure, developing system failure, la-
scanning direction. ser exposure system failure or driverelated
failure is considered.
Uneven density Check the density difference . Drum failure or developing system failure is
considered.

■ Solid black(TYPE 2/4)

Check item Check method Assumed cause


Transfer failure Check that the transfer failure does not appear on entire image. Transfer system failure is considered.
White line Check whether white lines appear on the image. Developing system failure is considered.
Uneven pitch Check whether lines appear on the image in the horizontal Drum failure, developing system failure, la-
scanning direction. ser exposure system failure or drive-related
failure is considered.

136
6. Troubleshooting

Check item Check method Assumed cause


Uneven density Check the density difference. Drum failure or developing system failure is
considered.

■ Solid white(TYPE 3/4)

Check item Check method Assumed cause


Fogging Check whether foggy image appears in the blank area. Drum failure, laser exposure system failure
or developing system failure is considered.
Black line Check whether black lines appear on the image. Laser light path failure, developing system
failure or cleaning (drum) failure is consid-
ered.

■ 2dot-2space(TYPE 5/6)

Check item Check method Assumed cause


Black line Check whether black lines appear on the image. Laser light path failure, developing system
failure, cleaning (drum) failure considered
White line Check whether white lines appear on the image. Primary Charging Wire failure or developing
system failure is considered.
Uneven pitch Check whether lines appear on the image in the horizontal Drum failure, developing system failure, la-
scanning direction. ser exposure system failure or drive-related
failure is considered.
Uneven density Check the density difference. Drum failure or developing system failure is
considered.

137
6. Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Items

Troubleshooting items list


Category Item Reference
Image failure Dirt Scattered image at center “Scattered image at center” on
page 138
Paper reverse side stained with toner “Paper Reverse Side Stained with
Toner” on page 139
Stained leading/trailing edge of paper “Stained Leading/Trailing Edge of
Paper” on page 139
Blur/Void Image transfer wrong/text void “Image Transfer Wrong/Text Void”
on page 140
Dot/Irregular Pitch White dot at reverse trailing edge of HT “White Dot at Reverse Trailing
Edge of HT” on page 140
Irregular transfer roller pitch (50mm) “Irregular Transfer Roller Pitch
(50mm)” on page 141
Operation fail- Paper jam Too large curl “Too Large Curl” on page 141
ure Paper jam due to solid image printed on the paper with “Paper Jam due to Solid Image
small leading-edge margin (1-4 mm) Printed on the Paper with Small
Leading-Edge Margin (1-4 mm)” on
page 142
Indication "Set the drum" indication “"Set the drum" Indication” on page
142

Image Faults
■ Scattered image at center

● Occurrence area
Pre-registration guide (Static eliminator)

● Cause
The image is scattered by the paper dust on the static eliminator of the pre-registration guide.

● Occurrence condition
Paper dust is stuck on the static eliminator of the pre-registration guide.

● Remedy
Cleaning of the static eliminator on the pre-registration transfer guide

1. Remove the right cover.

2. Pat the contaminated part on the static eliminator to remove the paper dust.

138
6. Troubleshooting

■ Paper Reverse Side Stained with Toner

● Occurrence area
• Fixing assembly (circumference: 75mm)
• Transfer roller (circumference: 50mm)

● Cause
• Fixing assembly
Removed toner from the paper is adhered onto the pressure roller and then it is adhered onto the reverse side of the paper.
• Transfer roller
Toner is remained on the drum when a jam occurs and the drum is suspended. The toner is adhered onto the transfer roller
during the recovery operation.

● Occurrence condition
• Fixing assembly
• In case that fixing ability is poor due to low temperature
• In case that mass halftone images are printed
• Time for replacement of the fixing assembly is in the near term.
• Transfer roller
• In case that paper jam occurs
• Time for replacement of the transfer unit is in the near term.

● Remedy
• Fixing assembly
Settings/Registration> Adjustment/ Maintenance> Clean Fixing Unit
• Transfer Roller
Settings/Registration> Adjustment/ Maintenance> Clean Transfer Roller

■ Stained Leading/Trailing Edge of Paper

● Occurrence area
• Transfer front guide
• Fixing inlet guide

139
6. Troubleshooting

● Cause
• Transfer front guide
The leading or trailing edge of the paper touches toner which is adhered onto the transfer front upper guide.
• Fixing inlet guide
The leading or trailing edge of the paper touches toner which is adhered onto the fixing inlet guide.

● Occurrence condition
When halftone or solid-black images are printed in succession

● Remedy
Use lens-cleaning papers or similar papers, clean the toner on the guide.

■ Image Transfer Wrong/Text Void

● Occurrence area
Transfer roller (circumference: 50mm)

● Cause
• Resistance of paper increases due to reduction in paper water content, resulting in insufficient transfer output.
• Resistance of paper decreases due to increase in paper water content, resulting in excessive transfer output.

● Occurrence condition
• Papers are left in the low-humidity environment
• Papers are left in the high-humidity environment

● Remedy
Settings/Registration> Adjustment/ Maintenance> Special Processing> Special Mode M> Low (MODE1/MODE2) or High
(MODE4/MODE5)

■ White Dot at Reverse Trailing Edge of HT

● Occurrence area
Fixing inlet guide

140
6. Troubleshooting

● Cause
Separation discharge occurs at the time of separation between the paper and the fixing inlet guide.

● Occurrence condition
Installation environment is different from the environment sensor detection.

● Remedy
Settings/Registration> Adjustment/ Maintenance> Special Processing> Special Mode M> High (MODE4/MODE5)

■ Irregular Transfer Roller Pitch (50mm)

● Occurrence area
Transfer Roller (50mm)

● Cause
Transfer current is reduced as paper dust is adhered on the transfer roller by continuous print especially high resistance paper.

● Occurrence condition
• Paper dust is adhered on the transfer roller
• Time to replacement of the transfer roller is in the near term.

● Remedy
Settings/Registration> Adjustment/ Maintenance> > Special Processing> Special Mode M> High (MODE4/MODE5)

Operation Faults
■ Too Large Curl

● Occurrence area
Fixing assembly

● Cause
Paper is curled when water amount of the paper on surface and back are varied from the high fixing temperature

● Occurrence condition
Papers are left in the high-humidity environment.

● Remedy
• Settings/Registration> Adjustment/ Maintenance> Special Processing> Special Mode N> N1 mode (MODE1) or N3 mode
(MODE2)
"N3 mode" reduces productivity.
• Install the optional cassette heater.

141
6. Troubleshooting

■ Paper Jam due to Solid Image Printed on the Paper with Small Leading-Edge
Margin (1-4 mm)
● Occurrence area
Fixing assembly

● Cause
When a solid image is printed on the paper with a small leading-edge margin (1-4 mm), paper is not available to cannot be easily
separated from the fixing film, causing a paper jam.

● Occurrence condition
Papers are left in a high-humidity environment or when a solid image is printed on the paper with a small leading-edge margin.

● Remedy
• Settings/Registration> Adjustment/ Maintenance> Special Processing> Special Mode O> On(MODE1/MODE2)
• Settings/Registration> Adjustment/ Maintenance> Special Processing> Special Mode N> N3 mode (MODE2)
*"Special Mode N>N3 mode (MODE2)" reduces the curl, however it results low productivity.

■ "Set the drum" Indication


● Occurrence area
• Drum unit
• Developing assembly

● Cause
Drum unit or developing assembly is not equipped. The host machine does not have function to detect the developing assembly.

● Occurrence condition
Drum unit or developing assembly is not equipped.

● Remedy
• Check that the drum unit is equipped.
• Check the connection of the developing assembly.

Others
■ Special mode (User mode)
The special modes in user mode are as follows.
Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Special Processing

Special Mode O
Outline Separation priority mode
Use case When paper jam by the poor separation occurs
Details Paper jams may frequently occur when using the multi-purpose tray to print on the reverse side of paper
that has already been printed on, depending on the paper type (especially with thin paper and curled paper).
In this case, change this setting to <Mode 1> or <Mode 2>.
Because strong separation bias is impressed on the leading edge of the sheet, separation performance is
improved.
If you change this setting to <On> when printing on paper other than thin paper, white patches may appear
in printed images.
Set range Mode0: Off, Mode1/Mode2: On
Default value Mode0

Special Mode M
Outline Transfer poor prevention mode
Use case When the transfer poor image occurs

142
6. Troubleshooting

Special Mode M
Details Marks from toner scattering may appear around text and patterns, depending on the paper type (especially
with heavy paper).
When the transfer output increases, the image is improved.
Printed image may get darker partiality by the paper type (especially with curled paper and damp paper).
When the transfer output increases, the image is improved.
Set range Mode1: transfer output down (strong)
Mode2: transfer output down
Mode3: off
Mode4: transfer output up
Mode5: transfer output up (strong)
Default value Mode3

Special Mode N
Outline Thin paper curl correction mode
Use case When paper jams occur in 2-sided printing using the curled paper and moist paper.
Details Paper jams may frequently occur when performing 2-sided printing, depending on the paper type (especially
with curled paper and damp paper). In this case, change this setting to Mode 1 (N1 mode) or Mode 2 (N3
mode).
N1 mode: Lower the fixing target temperature for all paper type.
N3 mode: Plain paper and special mode P are effective only in ON.
When the Mode 1/2 is set, the productivity decreases for initial rotation extension. Image failure by the lack
of transfer may occur so that the transfer electric current flows into the separation.
Set range Off: Mode1: N1 mode, Mode2: N3 mode
Default value Mode1

Special Mode S
Outline Shortening of wait time after the paper size change
Use case Shortening of wait time after the paper size change
Details When the paper size is changed, the machine stops operation until it is ready to feed different size paper.
Printed paper may curl by the paper type and the use environment.
Set range Off: wait time 120 seconds, Mode1: wait time 0 seconds, Mode2: wait time 10 seconds
Default value Off

Special Mode P
Outline The fixing control temperature mode of the curl prevention
Use case When the paper curl occurs
Details Lower the fixing control temperature in the plain paper mode.
Set range Off, On
Default value Off

Special Mode F
Outline Image smear prevention mode
Use case When image smear occurs
Details Correct the toner that stuck to the transfer roller on the drum by extending last rotation movement every
more than five prints of totals. And clean the drum.
Set range Off, Mode1: 5 seconds extension, Mode2: 10 seconds extension, Mode3: 30 seconds extension
Default value Off

143
6. Troubleshooting

Version Upgrade

Outline
Upgrading system software for host machine: Use the PC (UST).

Host machine PC

Controller PCB

USB cable
Flash ROM CPU

UST
System
software

Target PCB Category Target system software


Controller PCB iR2004/2204 boot
Main Controller
Download Program
Language

System Requirements
• OS (one of the following)
• Microsoft Windows Vista
• Microsoft Windows 7
• Microsoft Windows Server 2008
• Microsoft Windows 8
• Microsoft Windows 8.1
• Microsoft Windows Server 2013
• Microsoft Windows 10
• Mac OS X 10.4 or later
• PC
• Compatible to the selected OS
• Memory (RAM): 32MB or more free space
• Hard Disk: 100MB or more free space
• Display: 640x480 pixels or more in resolution, 256 tones or more
• With USB ports
• UST file for this product*
*: Download the corresponding file from the system CD or the service site (ask the servicetechnician in charge for details)
• USB cable (USB1.1/2.0) or LAN cable

Preparation
1. Start the PC.

2. Connect the device to the PC with the USB cable or LAN cable.

3. Turn on the device on standby.

4. Press [Menu] key to upgrade firmware in User mode.


Menu > System Management Settigs > Update Firmware > Via PC
• System Management Settings > [ID / PIN] > Update Firmware > Yes

5. Press OK then, “***DOWNLOAD MODE***” is shown on the display.

144
6. Troubleshooting

6. Wait for the motor of the host machine to stop.

CAUTION:
- Press STOP key to cancel Download mode and return to the normal operation.
- The system administrator ID and the password are changed back to the default values. <Manager ID: 7654321 / PIN:
7654321>
- Either is possible to Service Mode or User Mode.ServiceMode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD

Downloading System Software


1. Open UST.

USTUPD.exe

2. Take a note of the firmware version to upgrade and click [Next] button.

3. Click [Next] button.

145
6. Troubleshooting

4. Select [USB Device] and click [Next] button.

5. Click [Start] button.

6. Click [Yes] button for the warning message to start download.

7. Click [OK] button when download is completed.

8. Turn off and on the power to restart the device.

9. Output the spec report from Service mode to confirm if the firmware version is the same as that on the note taken
in Step 2). COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> SPEC

146
6. Troubleshooting

Upgrading via Internet


■ Overview
Select to automatically install the firmware update without using a computer. Follow the on-screen instructions to perform the
update. The machine must be connected to the Internet.
Menu > System Management Settings > Update Firmware > Via Internet

CAUTION:
• Refer to the User's Manual of the device for how to connect the device to the external network.
• This is applicable either in a wired LAN environment or a wireless LAN environment.

■ Preparation
1. Check that there are no other jobs being executed.

2. In an environment where access is obtained via a proxy server, the proxy setting is made from the remote UI. (Log
in with System Manager Mode)
Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Network Settings > TCP/IP Settings > Click [Edit...] in [Proxy Settings]
> Select the [Use Proxy] check box and specify the required settings.
> Click [OK].

■ Messages
The message displayed on the device operation panel is as follows.

No. Error message The timing of oc- Remedy


currence
1 Job in progress... If there is a job being 1. Wait until the job is completed.
Wait a moment, then try again. executed: 2. Cancel the job.
2 Cannot check the firmware version. Network error 1. Check whether the device can be connected to the ex-
(Server communication error.) ternal network.
2. Check whether the proxy setting has been made (in case
of access via a proxy server).
3 Cannot download the firmware. 1. Check whether the device can be connected to the ex-
(Error during download.) ternal network.
2. Check whether the proxy setting has been made (in case
of access via a proxy server).
3. Check that the serial number of the host machine is
shown on the Main Controller PCB.
4 ***DOWNLOAD MODE*** If update (writing) of 1. Update the firmware again using UST.
NETWORK AVAILABLE IP ADRESS the firmware has
IP address of the machine ended in failure:
PRESS STOP KEY TO EXIT
5 ***DOWNLOAD MODE***
FAILED TO UPDATE
6 ***DOWNLOAD MODE*** If the update of the -
UPDATE IS COMPLETE firmware is successful

147
6. Troubleshooting

Log Collector

Overview
A tool to collect operation status log of the machine (Log Collector) is provided as a means to analyze failure occurred in a field.
Collect the operation log using this tool when the Support Dept. of sales company so instructs.

CAUTION:
The following procedure is necessary for collecting necessary log.
1. Put the machine to the state where the symptom is reproduced.
2 . Turn OFF and then ON the power. (If the symptom is reboot, it is not necessary to turn OFF and then ON the power.)
3. Connect the machine and a PC using a USB cable.
4. Collect log by the following "Operation Procedure".

CAUTION:
Logs up to the point of turning OFF/ON the power are collected.
In order to avoid necessary log to be overwritten, do not turn OFF and then ON the power too much.

■ Scope of Application
• The tool is supported by Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8 and Windows 8.1, Windows 10
• Host machine and the PC which operates the tool are connected directly by an USB Cable. Multiple host machines cannot
be connected to a PC.

● What to Prepare
• Host machine
• USB Cable (Connector shape: A-B)
• PC with a usable USB port (OS: Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10)
• Tool(CanonLogCollector_Ver1.0.1.0.zip) *
* Obtain a tool according to instructions the Support Dept. of sale company so instructs. "1.0.1.0" indicates the version.

■ Operation Procedure
1. Connecting the USB Cable.
Connect the USB Cable while both the host machine and the PC are in operation.

2. Decompressing CanonLogCollector_Verx.x.x.x.zip.
Create any folder with a write permission on the PC.
When CanonLogCollector_ Verx.x.x.x.zip isdecompressed, "CanonLogCollector.exe" is extracted.

3. Starting the tool.


Double-click to start CanonLogCollector.exe. The CanonLogCollector screen opens.

148
6. Troubleshooting

4. Collecting the log.


Press the [Start] button on the CanonLogCollector screen.
When "Receiving log is successfully finished." isdisplayed, press the [Exit Program] button to close the tool.

The collected log is generated in TXT format in the folder where "CanonLogCollector.exe" is located.
Bring back and send the log to the Support Dept. of sales company so instructs. The log file is "usb_2011901_132658.log"
in the figure below.The capacity of the log file is approximately 1MB. The time needed to collect the log is approx. 10 seconds.

NOTE:
While the machine is in operation, log information is always added.
However, the storage area is limited, so the information is overwritten in the order from the old log information.Since log information
may be overwritten if a long time passes after error occurrence, be sure to collect log as soon as possible.

Naming rule for log file:


It is recorded with usb_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.log.yyyymmdd_hhmmss indicates year, month, date, and time (hour, minute,
second) when the log is collected.

■ Troubleshooting
If the message " Receiving log is finished. (Receivetimeout ). " appears by pressing [Start] button on the Canon Log Collector
screen, forwarding of log data from the machine to a PC has been failed.
If forwarding is failed, the size is approximately 1KB.
If the size of a log file is around 1KB, check the setting of USB connection and collect log again.
If log cannot be collected even though the setting of USB connection has been made correctly on a PC, turn OFF and then ON
the main power of the machine.

149
7 Error/Jam/Alarm
Outline...............................................151
Error Code.........................................153
Jam Code..........................................158
Alarm Code....................................... 160
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Outline
This chapter describes various codes which are displayed when a failure occurs on the product. These are classified into 3 codes
as follows.

Code type Explanation Reference


Error code This code is displayed when an error occurs on the machine. “Error Code” on page 153
*1
It is also possible to confirm only an occurring error in LUI.
Display of max. 50 items
Jam code This code is displayed when a jam occurs inside the machine. “Jam Code” on page 158
*1
Display of max. 50 items
Alarm code This code is displayed when a function of the machine is mal- “Alarm Code” on page 160
functioned. *1
Display of max. 50 items

*1: It is possible to confirm it by outputting the report in COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> ERR-LOG.
It is not displayed in LUI.

Location code
Jam code include the location information and the occurrence division information.
Location information and occurrence division information are displayed as 1-digit number as follows.

Device Location code Occurrence division code


Host machine 3 0
ADF 4 1

Pickup position code


When jam occurs, pickup location is indicated with the following pickup position code.

Pickup position Pickup position code


ADF (DADF-AT1) -
Multi-purpose Tray 0
Cassette 1 1
Cassette 2 (Cassette Feeding Module-AD1) 2
When paper pickup mouth position is uncertain 5
Duplex (Duplex Unit-C1) 7

151
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Report output example

2204

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7][8]

[6]

[6]

No. Item Description


[1] Occurrences No. Indicates the order of occur coad.The largest number is latest code.
[2] Occurrences date Indicates the date of occur code.
[3] Occurrences time Indicates the time of occur code.
[4]* Recover time Indicates the time of recover.
[5]* Location code Indicates the location of occur code.
[6] Code Indicates the each coad.
[7]* Pickup position code Indicates the pickup position.
[8]* Paper size Indicates the paper size.

*Indicated only jam code.

152
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Error Code

Error Code Details


Ecode Detail Code Item Description
E000 0000 Title Fixing assembly temperature insufficient rise at the startup temperature control
Description The fixing assembly does not rise to the constant temperature within specified time
at the startup temperature control.
Remedy 1. Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER>FUNCTION> CLEAR>
ERR; and then turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connector between the fixing assembly and the controller PCB
(PCB1).
3. Replace the fixing assembly.
4. Replace the controller PCB (PCB1).
E001 0000 Title Fixing assembly temperature abnormal rise (main thermistor)
Description The reading of the main thermistor is 240 deg C or more.
Remedy 1. Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR>
ERR; and then turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connector between the fixing assembly and the controller PCB
(PCB1).
3. Replace the fixing assembly.
4. Replace the controller PCB (PCB1).
E001 0001 Title Fixing assembly temperature abnormal rise (sub thermistor)
Description The reading of the sub thermistor is 295 deg C or more.
Remedy 1. Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR>
ERR; and then turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connector between the fixing assembly and the controller PCB
(PCB1).
3. Replace the fixing assembly.
4. Replace the controller PCB (PCB1).
E002 0000 Title Fixing assembly temperature insufficient rise at the print temperature control
Description The fixing assembly does not rise to the constant temperature within specified time
at the print temperature control.
Remedy 1. Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR>
ERR; and then turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connector between the fixing assembly and the controller PCB
(PCB1).
3. Replace the fixing assembly.
4. Replace the controller PCB (PCB1).
E003 0000 Title Low fixing temperature detection after standby (main thermistor)
Description The reading of the main thermistor is less than specified temperature.
Remedy 1. Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR>
ERR; and then turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connector between the fixing assembly and the controller PCB
(PCB1).
3. Replace the fixing assembly.
4. Replace the controller PCB (PCB1).
E003 0001 Title Low fixing temperature detection after standby (sub thermistor)
Description The reading of the sub thermistor is less than specified temperature.
Remedy 1. Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR>
ERR; and then turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connector between the fixing assembly and the controller PCB
(PCB1).
3. Replace the fixing assembly.
4. Replace the controller PCB (PCB1).
E004 0000 Title Thermistor disconnection detection error.
Description When thermistor disconnection is detected without specified time.
When the wrong connection of the thermistor relay connector is detected.

153
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Ecode Detail Code Item Description


E004 0000 Remedy 1. Check the connection of the thermistor relay connector.
Main thermistor relay connector: J867
Sub thermistor relay connector: J868
2. Check the connector between the fixing assembly and the controller PCB
(PCB1).
3. Replace the fixing assembly.
4. Replace the controller PCB (PCB1).
E010 0000 Title Unstable rotation of the main motor (M202)
Description Failure of the main motor (M202)
Remedy 1. Check connection of the main motor connector.
2. Replace the main motor (M202).
3. Replace the controller PCB (PCB1).
E014 0000 Title The fixing release is not possible by the fixing motor (M201).
Description Driving the fixing motor, the fixing release is not detected by the fixing pressure re-
lease sensor (SR202).
Remedy 1. Check connection of the fixing motor connector.
2. Replace the fixing motor (M201).
3. Check connection of the fixing pressure release sensor connector.
4. Replace the fixing pressure release sensor (SR202).
5. Replace the controller PCB (PCB1).
E014 0001 Title The fixing pressure is not possible by the fixing motor (M201).
Description Driving the fixing motor, the fixing pressure is not detected by the fixing pressure
release sensor (SR202).
Remedy 1. Check connection of the fixing motor connector.
2. Replace the fixing motor (M201).
3. Check connection of the fixing pressure release sensor connector.
4. Replace the fixing pressure release sensor (SR202).
5. Replace the controller PCB (PCB1).
E019 0001 Title Waste toner full detection
Description When the paper was printed more than 100 sheets in the state that waste toner full
alarm was detected.
Remedy Replace the drum unit.
E019 0002 Title Failure of the waste toner full sensor (SR204)
Description Failure of the waste toner full sensor (SR204)
Remedy 1. Check connection of the waster toner full sensor connector.
2. Replace the waste toner full sensor (SR204).
3. Replace the controller PCB (PCB1).
E052 0000 Title Duplex unit detection error
Description The connection of the duplex unit is abnormal.
Remedy 1. Check the connectors of the duplex unit and controller PCB.
2. Replace the duplex controller PCB.
3. Replace the controller PCB (PCB1).
E110 0000 Title Failure of the polygon motor (M203)
Description The polygon motor (M203) does not indicate a ready state a specific period of time
after the polygon motor (M203) has been started.
Remedy 1. Check connection of the polygon motor connector.
2. Replace the laser scanner unit.
3. Replace the controller PCB (PCB1).
E196 0000 Title Memory data abnormality trouble
Description Cannot output right data
Remedy 1. Install the set of the controller firmware.
2. Replace the controller PCB.
E196 0001 Title Memory access abnormality trouble
Description Cannot output right data
Remedy 1. Install the set of the controller firmware.
2. Replace the controller PCB.
E196 0002 Title Memory operation abnormality trouble
Description Cannot output right data

154
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Ecode Detail Code Item Description


E196 0002 Remedy 1. Install the set of the controller firmware.
2. Replace the controller PCB.
E196 2000 Title Controller PCB reading/writing error
Description Error in reading/writing of setting values storage area in the Controller PCB
Remedy 1. Install the set of the controller firmware.
2. Replace the controller PCB (PCB1).
E202 0001 Title CIS unit HP error (outward)
Description CIS unit did not move to HP even it moved backward.
Remedy 1. Replace the contact sensor HP sensor (SR402).
2. Replace the reader motor (M301).
3. Replace the CIS unit.
4. Replace the Reader unit.
E202 0002 Title CIS Unit HP error (homeward)
Description CIS unit did not move to HP even it moved forward.
Remedy 1. Replace the contact sensor HP sensor (SR402).
2. Replace the reader motor (M301).
3. Replace the CIS unit.
4. Replace the Reader unit.
E225 0001 Title The light intensity of the CIS unit is faulty.
Description The light intensity of the CIS during shading is under the specified level.
Remedy 1. Disconnect and then connect the flexible cable.
2. Replace the flexible cable.
3. Replace the CIS unit.
4. Replace the controller PCB (PCB1).
E246 0000 Title System error
Description System error.
Remedy Contact to the sales companies.
E247 0000 Title System error
Description System error.
Remedy Contact to the sales companies.
E261 0000 Title Error in zero cross
Description Error in zero cross.
Remedy 1. Check the connectors.
2. Replace the controller PCB (PCB1).
3. Replace the power supply PCB (PCB2).
E350 0000 Title System error
Description System error.
Remedy Contact to the sales companies.
E354 0000 Title System error
Description System error.
Remedy Contact to the sales companies.
E355 0000 Title System error
Description System error.
Remedy Contact to the sales companies.
E355 0004 Title System error
Description System error.
Remedy Contact to the sales companies.
E355 0005 Title System error
Description System error.
Remedy Contact to the sales companies.
E716 0000 Title Optional cassette connection error
Description The connection of the optional cassette is abnormal.
Remedy 1. Check the connectors of the optional cassette and controller PCB.
2. Replace the option cassette controller PCB (PCB6).
3. Replace the power supply PCB (PCB2).
E733 0000 Title Controller communication error

155
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Ecode Detail Code Item Description


E733 0000 Description The pickup assembly and delivery assembly without the connection were appointed
by the controller.
Remedy 1. Check the connectors of the controller PCB (PCB1).
2. Replace the controller PCB (PCB1).
3. Replace the power supply PCB (PCB2).
E736 0000 Title There is not an FAX board in an FAX model
Description Not detect FAX board in an FAX model
Remedy 1. Install the set of the controller firmware.
2. Replace the FAX PCB.
3. Replace the Controller PCB.
E740 0002 Title Error detection on either Network Board or Mac address
Description Detect the abnormality of the network function
Remedy 1. Install the set of the controller firmware.
2. Replace the Controller PCB.
E744 0002 Title Language file size error
Description The size of the language file exceeded the upper limit.
Remedy Install the set of the controller firmware.
E744 4000 Title Engine ID error
Description Invalid engine connection was detected.
Remedy 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
2. Check the controller PCB (PCB1).
3. Install the set of the controller firmware.
4. Check the model code. (When the model code and the engine code are mis-
matched, E744-4000 occurs.)
E744 6000 Title WLAN board error
Description WLAN board error occurred
Remedy 1. The connection check of a controller board and the WLAM board.
2. Install the set of the controller firmware.
3. Replace theWLAN board
4. Replace the controller PCB (PCB1).
E760 0001 Title Controller process error
Description Controller process error occurred.
Remedy Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
E805 0000 Title Failure of the fixing cooling fan (FM1)
Description The fixing cooling fan (FM1) was locked for a specified consecutive period of time.
Remedy 1. Check the connection of the fixing cooling fan (FM1).
2. Replace the fixing cooling fan (FM1).

Fax or scanned document error code


Code Cause Correspondence
001 A document jams in the feeder. Remove the jammed document.
003 A fax could not be sent or received due to its large data When sending a fax: Reduce the resolution, and scan the docu-
size. ment.
When receiving a fax: Ask the sender to divide the document into
multiple sections or reduce the resolution before sending.
005 A fax could not be sent because the recipient's machine When the recipient's machine is turned OFF or the line is busy, a
did not respond within 35 seconds. fax may not be sent. Ask the recipient to check the machine sta-
tus. When sending the fax overseas, insert pauses in the fax
number.
012 A fax could not be sent because the recipient's machine Ask the recipient to reload the paper.
ran out of paper.
018 A fax could not be sent since the recipient's machine did When the recipient's machine is turned OFF or the line is busy, a
not respond because the line was busy or for other rea- fax may not be sent. Ask the recipient to check the machine sta-
sons. tus. When sending the fax overseas, insert pauses in the fax
number.

156
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Code Cause Correspondence


022 Sending of a fax from a computer is disabled. To send a fax from a computer, you need to set <Allow Fax Driver
A fax could not be forwarded because the specified des- TX> to <On>. For more information, contact your Administrator.
tination was deleted from the Address Book. Register the forwarding destination again. If the documents that
failed to be forwarded remain in memory, you can forward it again.
037 Memory is full. If a sending or printing job is queued, wait until the job is comple-
ted.
If a received document is stored in memory, print or delete it.
If sending a document with many pages, divide it into multiple
sections.
If sending a fax, reduce the resolution to scan the document.
099 Printing, sending, or receiving was canceled. When you cancel an operation, this error code is displayed, but
this is not abnormal. Print, send, or receive documents again as
necessary.
701 The specified department ID does not exist. Or, the PIN Enter the correct department ID or PIN using the numeric keys (0
was changed. to 9), and then try executing the job again.
The department ID or PIN was changed while the job was Execute the job again using the new department ID and PIN. If
being processed. you do not know the PIN,
contact the system administrator.
Receiving of print jobs with unknown IDs and remote scan Action Set <Allow Prnt Jobs w/ Unknown IDs> and <Allow Scan
jobs with unknown IDs is set to <Off>. Jobs w/ Unknown IDs> in [Department ID Management On/Off]
to <On>.
816 The number set in page restriction of Department ID Contact your system administrator.
Management has been exceeded, and printing cannot be
performed.
852 An error occurred because the main power was turned Check that the power cord is securely inserted in the outlet, the
OFF due to an unspecified cause while a job was being power cannot be easily cut, etc., and then try executing the job
processed. again as necessary.
853 A job could not be executed due to insufficient resources, Reduce the number of pages or execute the job again when no
caused by trying to print a large number of pages at the other jobs are scheduled.
same time, etc.
The job could not be executed because it was cancelled Execute the job again.
from the print driver while print data was being sent from
the computer to the machine.
995 A document waiting to be sent was canceled. Send the document again as necessary.

157
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Jam Code

Main Unit (Included with the Cassette Feeding Module-AD1 and the
Duplex Unit-C1)

S203
SR201

SR503 SR211

SR207

SR502

ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor ID Sensor Name


0 0104 Delay jam SR207 Pre-registration sensor
SR502 Cassette 2 pickup sensor
0 0208 Stationary jam SR207 Pre-registration sensor
0 010C Delay jam SR201 Fixing delivery sensor
SR203* Delivery sensor
0 0210 Stationary jam SR201 Fixing delivery sensor
SR203* Delivery sensor
0 1014 Power-on jam SR201 Fixing delivery sensor
SR203* Delivery sensor
SR207 Pre-registration sensor
SR211 Arch sensor
SR502 Cassette 2 pickup sensor
SR503 Duplex feed sensor
0 1118 Cover open jam - -
0 0221 Stationary jam SR203* Delivery sensor
0 0124 Delay jam SR503 Duplex feed sensor

*: Network model only

158
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

DADF-AM1
SR11

SR8

SR6
SR7

SR10
SR11

SR7
SR6
SR8

SR401

ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor ID Sensor Name


1 0003 Delay jam SR8 Registration paper sensor
1 0004 Stationary jam SR8 Registration paper sensor
1 0005 Delay jam SR7 Read sensor
1 0006 Stationary jam SR7 Read sensor
1 0007 Delay jam SR6 Delivery reversal sensor
1 0008 Stationary jam SR6 Delivery reversal sensor
1 0044 Stationary jam(first original) SR8 Registration paper sensor
1 0045 Delay jam(first original) SR7 Read sensor
1 0046 Stationary jam(first original) SR7 Read sensor
1 0047 Delay jam(first original) SR6 Delivery reversal sensor
1 0048 Stationary jam(first original) SR6 Delivery reversal sensor
1 0071 Timing error - -
1 0090 ADF open jam SR401 Copyboard Cover open/ closed Sensor
1 0091 User ADF open jam SR401 Copyboard Cover open/ closed Sensor
1 0092 ADF cover open jam SR10 Cover open/close sensor
1 0093 User cover open jam SR10 Cover open/close sensor
SR6 Delivery reversal sensor
1 0094 Initial stationary jam SR7 Read sensor
SR8 Registration paper sensor
1 0095 Pickup NG SR11 Document set sensor

159
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Alarm Code

Alarm Code Details

Alarm Code Title Movement /Cause /Measures


10-0020 Toner cartridge prior delivery alarm -
10-0100 Toner cartridge replacement alarm -
Movement: Temperature and the humidity are fixed. Then the
change of the high voltage output is not performed.
Cause: Connection of the environment sensor cannot be detected
31-0005 Environment sensor reading alarm or the environment sensor is failure.
Measures:
1. Check the connection of the environment sensor (HU1).
2. Replace the environment sensor (HU1).
85-0001 System error clear -
Auto-restore caused by service replace-
85-0002 -
ment
Auto-restore caused by service replace-
85-0003 -
ment
Auto-restore caused by service replace-
85-0004 -
ment
Auto-restore caused by service replace-
85-0005 -
ment

160
8 Service Mode
Overview........................................... 162
COPIER............................................ 164
FEEDER............................................193
FAX................................................... 196
TESTMODE...................................... 208
8. Service Mode

Overview

Outline of Service Mode


Service mode

COPIER Service mode for copier

DISPLAY State display mode


I/O I/O display mode
ADJUST Adjustment mode
FUNCTION Operation / inspection mode
OPTION Specification setting mode
COUNT ER Counter mode

FEEDER ADF service mode

ADJUST Adjustment mode


FUNCTION Operation / inspection mode

FAX FAX service mode

SSSW Bit switch registration mode


MENU Menu switch registration mode
NUM Numeric parameter setting mode
NCU NCU parameter setting mode
(Service adjustment is not available)

TESTMODE Service mode for test print, operation check, etc.

PRINT Print test mode


FAX FAX test mode

Backing up Service Mode


Each device is tuned at the time of shipment and the tuned values are written on the service label.
However, when replacing the controller PCB or clearing RAM, tuned ADJUST and OPTION values are reset to defaults. Each
service technician should adjust these values in field and ensure to write values after changes in the service label. If the
corresponding item is not found on the service label, enter the value in the blank space.

■ Service Label
The service label is affixed inside the rear cover.

162
8. Service Mode

Screen Flow of Service Mode


• Initial / Category / Sub category screen
Select the item: Touch the item
View the previous item: Back Key

SERVICE MODE
COPIER
FEEDER
TESTMODE

• Item selection screen


Select the item: Touch the item
View the previous item: Back Key

ADJ-X :0
ADJ-Y :0
ADJ-Y-DF :0
ADJ-X-MG :0
STRD-POS :0
• Input value screen
Enter the setting value : Numeric key /Up or Down Key on the Touch Panel
Reset the counte: Reset Key
Change the setting : Apply on the Touch Panel
Maintain the setting : Back Key

ADJ-X
0
(-30 - 30)


Apply

163
8. Service Mode

COPIER

DISPLAY
■ VERSION
COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION
MAIN Display of MAIN (main program) version
Details To display the firmware version of controller PCB.
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 00.00 to 99.99
Default value 0
BOOT Title BootROM version
Details To display the BootROM version
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 00.00 to 99.99
Default value 0
LANG Language pack version
Details To display the version of language pack.
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 00.00 to 99.99
Default value 0
ECONT Engine ROM version
Details To display the version of engine ROM.
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 00.00 to 99.99
Default value 0
OPT-DUP Duplex Unit version
Details To display the version of duplex Unit.
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 00.00 to 99.99
Default value 0

■ CCD
COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD
TARGET-B Shading target value (Blue color of the copyboard)
Details To display the shading target value of Blue color using the copyboard.
Continuous display of 1 (minimum) or 511 (maximum) is considered a failure of the
CIS Unit.
Use case • At scanned image failure
• When replacing the controller PCB/CIS unit
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 1 to 511
Default value 287
Related service mode COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-X/Y/Z
TARGET-G Shading target value (Green color of the copyboard)
Details To display the shading target value of Green color using the copyboard.
Continuous display of 1 (minimum) or 511 (maximum) is considered a failure of the
CIS Unit.
Use case • At scanned image failure
• When replacing the controller PCB/CIS unit
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 1 to 511
Default value 286

164
8. Service Mode

COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD


TARGET-G Related service mode COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-X/Y/Z
TARGET-R Shading target value (Red color of the copyboard)
Details To display the shading target value of Red color using the copyboard.
Continuous display of 1 (minimum) or 511 (maximum) is considered a failure of the
CIS Unit.
Use case • At scanned image failure
• When replacing the controller PCB/CIS unit
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 1 to 511
Default value 284
Related service mode COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-X/Y/Z
TARGETBW Shading target value (B&W color of the copyboard)
Details To display the shading target value at B&W color using the copyboard.
Continuous display of 1 (minimum) or 511 (maximum) is considered a failure of the
CIS Unit.
Use case • At scanned image failure
• When replacing the controller PCB/CIS unit
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 1 to 511
Default value 285
Related service mode COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-X/Y/Z
DFTAR-R Shading target value (Red color of the DADF)
Details To display the shading target value of Red color using the DADF.
Continuous display of 1 (minimum) or 511 (maximum) is considered a failure of the
CIS Unit.
Use case • At scanned image failure
• When replacing the controller PCB/CIS unit
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 1 to 511
Default value 284
Related service mode COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL3/DF-WLVL4
DFTAR-G Shading target value (Green color of the DADF)
Details To display the shading target value of Green color using the DADF.
Continuous display of 1 (minimum) or 511 (maximum) is considered a failure of the
CIS Unit.
Use case • At scanned image failure
• When replacing the controller PCB/CIS unit
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 1 to 511
Default value 286
Related service mode COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL3/DF-WLVL4
DFTAR-B Shading target value (Blue color of the DADF)
Details To display the shading target value of Blue color using the DADF.
Continuous display of 1 (minimum) or 511 (maximum) is considered a failure of the
CIS Unit.
Use case • At scanned image failure
• When replacing the controller PCB/CIS unit
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 1 to 511
Default value 287
Related service mode COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL3/DF-WLVL4
DFTAR-BW Shading target value (B&W color of the DADF)
Details To display the shading target value of B&W color using the DADF.
Continuous display of 1 (minimum) or 511 (maximum) is considered a failure of the
CIS Unit.
Use case • At scanned image failure
• When replacing the controller PCB/CIS unit

165
8. Service Mode

COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD


DFTAR-BW Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 1 to 511
Default value 285
Related service mode COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL1/DF-WLVL2
OFST-BW0 CIS offset level adjustment value: BW 0
Details To display the offset level adjustment value (BW 0) of CIS.
Use case When judging whether this adjustment value is appropriate in the case that an image
failure due to CIS occurs.
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 0 to 255
Default value 128
OFST-BW1 CIS offset level adjustment value: BW 1
Details To display the offset level adjustment value (BW 1) of CIS.
Use case When judging whether this adjustment value is appropriate in the case that an image
failure due to CIS occurs.
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 0 to 255
Default value 128
OFST-BW2 CIS offset level adjustment value: BW 2
Details To display the offset level adjustment value (BW 2) of CIS.
Use case When judging whether this adjustment value is appropriate in the case that an image
failure due to CIS occurs.
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 0 to 255
Default value 128
OFST-BW3 CIS offset level adjustment value: BW 3
Details To display the offset level adjustment value (BW 3) of CIS.
Use case When judging whether this adjustment value is appropriate in the case that an image
failure due to CIS occurs.
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 0 to 255
Default value 128
OFST-BW4 CIS offset level adjustment value: BW 4
Details To display the offset level adjustment value (BW 4) of CIS.
Use case When judging whether this adjustment value is appropriate in the case
that an image failure due to CIS occurs.
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 0 to 255
Default value 128
OFST-BW5 CIS offset level adjustment value: BW 5
Details To display the offset level adjustment value (BW 5) of CIS.
Use case When judging whether this adjustment value is appropriate in the case that an image
failure due to CIS occurs.
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 0 to 255
Default value 128
OFST-CL0 CIS offset level adjustment value: CL 0
Details To display the offset level adjustment value (CL 0) of CIS.
Use case When judging whether this adjustment value is appropriate in the case that an image
failure due to CIS occurs
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 0 to 255
Default value 128
OFST-CL1 CIS offset level adjustment value: CL 1
Details To display the offset level adjustment value (CL 1) of CIS.

166
8. Service Mode

COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD


OFST-CL1 Use case When judging whether this adjustment value is appropriate in the case that an image
failure due to CIS occurs
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 0 to 255
Default value 128
OFST-CL2 CIS offset level adjustment value: CL 2
Details To display the offset level adjustment value (CL 2) of CIS.
Use case When judging whether this adjustment value is appropriate in the case that an image
failure due to CIS occurs
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 0 to 255
Default value 128
OFST-CL3 CIS offset level adjustment value: CL 3
Details To display the offset level adjustment value (CL 3) of CIS.
Use case When judging whether this adjustment value is appropriate in the case that an image
failure due to CIS occurs
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 0 to 255
Default value 128
OFST-CL4 CIS offset level adjustment value: CL 4
Details To display the offset level adjustment value (CL 4) of CIS.
Use case When judging whether this adjustment value is appropriate in the case that an image
failure due to CIS occurs
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 0 to 255
Default value 128
OFST-CL5 CIS offset level adjustment value: CL 5
Details To display the offset level adjustment value (CL 5) of CIS.
Use case When judging whether this adjustment value is appropriate in the case that an image
failure due to CIS occurs
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 0 to 255
Default value 128
GAIN-BW0 CIS gain level adjustment value: BW 0
Details To display the B&W gain level adjustment value (BW 0) of the CIS.
Use case When image failure occurs at reading in BW mode
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 0 to 255
Default value 0
GAIN-BW1 CIS gain level adjustment value: BW 1
Details To display the B&W gain level adjustment value (BW 1) of the CIS.
Use case When image failure occurs at reading in BW mode
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 0 to 255
Default value 0
GAIN-BW2 CIS gain level adjustment value: BW 2
Details To display the B&W gain level adjustment value (BW 2) of the CIS.
Use case When image failure occurs at reading in BW mode
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 0 to 255
Default value 0
GAIN-BW3 CIS gain level adjustment value: BW 3
Details To display the B&W gain level adjustment value (BW 3) of the CIS.
Use case When image failure occurs at reading in BW mode
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)

167
8. Service Mode

COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD


GAIN-BW3 Display/adj/set range 0 to 255
Default value 0
GAIN-BW4 CIS gain level adjustment value: BW 4
Details To display the B&W gain level adjustment value (BW 4) of the CIS.
Use case When image failure occurs at reading in BW mode
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 0 to 255
Default value 0
GAIN-BW5 CIS gain level adjustment value: BW 5
Details To display the B&W gain level adjustment value (BW 5) of the CIS.
Use case When image failure occurs at reading in BW mode
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 0 to 255
Default value 0
GAIN-CL0 CIS gain level adjustment value: CL 0
Details To display the Color gain level adjustment value (CL 0) of the CIS.
Use case When image failure occurs at reading in color mode
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 0 to 255
Default value 0
GAIN-CL1 CIS gain level adjustment value: CL 1
Details To display the Color gain level adjustment value (CL 1) of the CIS.
Use case When image failure occurs at reading in color mode
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 0 to 255
Default value 0
GAIN-CL2 CIS gain level adjustment value: CL 2
Details To display the Color gain level adjustment value (CL 2) of the CIS.
Use case When image failure occurs at reading in color mode
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 0 to 255
Default value 0
GAIN-CL3 CIS gain level adjustment value: CL 3
Details To display the Color gain level adjustment value (CL 3) of the CIS.
Use case When image failure occurs at reading in color mode
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 0 to 255
Default value 0
GAIN-CL4 CIS gain level adjustment value: CL 4
Details To display the Color gain level adjustment value (CL 4) of the CIS.
Use case When image failure occurs at reading in color mode
Display/adj/set range 0 to 255
Default value 0
GAIN-CL5 CIS gain level adjustment value: CL 5
Details To display the Color gain level adjustment value (CL 5) of the CIS.
Use case When image failure occurs at reading in color mode
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 0 to 255
Default value 0

■ SPDTYPE
COPIER> DISPLAY> SPDTYPE
SPDTYPE    Display of engine speed type

168
8. Service Mode

COPIER> DISPLAY> SPDTYPE


SPDTYPE    Details To display the engine speed type of this machine.
Use case When checking the engine speed type
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Display/adj/set range 20cpm / 22cpm

I/O
■ R-CON
COPIER> IO> R-CON
Address BIT Name Remarks
P001 0 Copyboard cover open/closed sensor (SR401) 0: Open
1 Contact sensor HP sensor (SR402) 1: HP
2-7 Not used. '0' is displayed. -
P002 - Not used. '0' is displayed. -

■ FEEDER
COPIER> IO> FEEDER
Address BIT Name Remarks
P001 0 Document width sensor 1(SR1) A4:0 LTR:0 A5R:1
1 Document width sensor 2(SR2) A4:0 LTR:1 A5R:0
2-3 Not used. '0' is displayed. -
4 Delivery reversal sensor (SR6) 1: paper presence
5 Read sensor (SR7) 1: paper presence
6 Not used. '0' is displayed. -
7 Registration paper sensor (SR8) 1: paper presence
8 Document length sensor 2(SR5) 0: paper presence
9 Document length sensor 1(SR4) 0: paper presence
10 Not used. '0' is displayed. -
11 Cover open/close sensor (SR10) 1: close
12 Last document detection sensor (SR3) 1: paper presence
13 Document set sensor (SR11) 1: paper presence

ADJUST
■ ADJ-XY
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY
ADJ-X Adjustment of image position in book mode: vertical scan
Details To adjust the image reading start position in the vertical scanning direction
at copyboard
reading.
When replacing the controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
When the non-image width is larger than the standard value, set the smaller
value.
When out of original area is copied, set the larger value.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position moves to the rear side
by 0.1mm.
Use case • When replacing the Reader Unit
• When replacing the CIS unit
• When replacing the controller PCB
• When clearing the RAM

169
8. Service Mode

COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY


ADJ-X Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service
label.
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press Apply.
Display/adj/set range 1 to 211
Unit 0.1 mm
Default value 20
ADJ-Y Adjustment of image position in book mode: horizontal scan
Details To adjust the image reading start position (image leading edge position) in
the horizontal scanning direction at copyboard reading.
When replacing the controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
When the non-image width is larger than the standard value, set the smaller
value.
When out of original area is copied, set the larger value.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position moves to the trailing
edge side
by 0.1mm.
Use case • When replacing the Reader Unit
• When replacing the CIS unit
• When replacing the controller PCB
• When clearing the RAM
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press Apply.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service
label.
Display/adj/set range -25 to 25
Unit 0.1 mm
Default value 0
ADJ-S Adjusting the home position of the CIS unit
Details To change the position to measure data for shading correction with standard
white plate (vertical scanning direction) by adjusting the home position of the
CIS unit. As the value is incremented by 1, CIS unit moves to the vertical
scanning direction by 0.1mm.
Use case • When replacing the CIS unit
• When replacing the controller PCB
• When clearing the RAM
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press Apply.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service
label.
Display/adj/set range 35 to 200
Unit 0.1 mm
Default value 42
ADJ-Y-DF Adjustment of image position in ADF mode: horizontal scanning
Details To adjust the image reading start position in the horizontal scanning direction
at ADF reading. When replacing the controller PCB/clearing the RAM data,
enter the value of service label. As the value is incremented by 1, the image
position moves to the front side by 0.1mm.
Use case • When replacing the DADF Unit
• When replacing the Reader Unit
• When replacing the CIS unit
• When replacing the controller PCB
• When clearing the RAM
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press Apply.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service
label.
Display/adj/set range -50 to 35
Unit 0.1 mm
Default value 0
ADJ-X-MG Fine adjustment of image magnification ratio in book mode (vertical scanning direction)

170
8. Service Mode

COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY


ADJ-X-MG Details To make a fine adjustment of image magnification ratio in the vertical scan-
ning direction at copyboard reading by changing the reading cycle of CIS.
When replacing the Reader Unit/ADF/CIS unit, controller PCB or clearing
the RAM, enter the value of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image magnification changes by 0.1%.
+: Reduce
-: Enlarge
Use case • When replacing the DADF Unit
• When replacing the Reader Unit
• When replacing the CIS unit
• When replacing the controller PCB
• When clearing the RAM
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press Apply.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service
label.
Display/adj/set range -10 to 10
Unit 0.1%
Default value 0
STRD-POS Adjustment of reading position at ADF stream reading
Details When replacing the CIS, controller PCB/clearing the RAM data, enter the
value of service label.
To adjust the reading position at ADF stream reading.
As the value is incremented by 1, the reading position of the CIS unit moves
to the right side by 0.1mm.
Execute continuously COPIER > FUNCTION >CCD >DF-WLVL1/DF-
WLVL2/DFWLVL3/
DF-WLVL4 after this item setting.
Use case • When replacing the CIS unit
• When replacing the controller PCB
• When clearing the RAM
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press Apply.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service
label.
When COPIER > FUNCTION >CCD >DF-WLVL1/DF-WLVL2/DF-WLVL3/
DFWLVL4 is not continuously executed after this item setting, a normal im-
age may not be output.
Display/adj/set range 1 to 130
Unit 0.1 mm
Default value 61
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STRD-POS
COPIER > FUNCTION >CCD >DF-WLVL1/DF-WLVL2/DF-WLVL3/DF-
WLVL4

■ CCD
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD
W-PLT-X White level data(X) entry of white plate
Details To enter the white level data (X) for the Standard White Plate. When replacing
the ADF/reader upper unit/controller PCB, enter the value of barcode label which
is affixed on the reader upper cover.
Use case • When replacing the DADF
• When replacing the Reader Unit
• When replacing the CIS unit
• When replacing the controller PCB
• When clearing the RAM
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press Apply.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/adj/set range 1 to 9999
Default value 8411
Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-Y, W-PLT-Z

171
8. Service Mode

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD


W-PLT-Y White level data(Y) entry of white plate
Details To enter the white level data (Y) for the Standard White Plate. When replacing
the ADF/reader upper unit/controller PCB, enter the value of barcode label which
is affixed on the reader upper cover.
Use case • When replacing the DADF
• When replacing the Reader Unit
• When replacing the CIS unit
• When replacing the controller PCB
• When clearing the RAM
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press Apply.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/adj/set range 1 to 9999
Default value 8878
Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Z
W-PLT-Z White level data(Z) entry of white plate
Details To enter the white level data (Z) for the Standard White Plate. When replacing
the ADF/reader upper unit/controller PCB, enter the value of barcode label which
is affixed on the reader upper cover.
Use case • When replacing the DADF
• When replacing the Reader Unit
• When replacing the CIS unit
• When replacing the controller PCB
• When clearing the RAM
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press Apply.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/adj/set range 1 to 9999
Default value 9419
Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Y

■ FEED-ADJ
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ
ADJ-C1 Cassette1 write start position in Horizontal Scanning Direction
Details To adjust the image write start position in the Horizontal scanning direction
when picking up paper from the Cassette 1 (standard Pickup Cassette).
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is in-
creased by 0.5 mm.
+: Left margin becomes larger (An image moves to the right.)
-: Left margin becomes smaller (An image moves to the left.)
When replacing the controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
Use case • When replacing the controller PCB
• When clearing the RAM
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press Apply.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/adj/set range -12 to 12
Unit Approx. 0.5 mm
Default value 0
ADJ-C2 Cassette2 write start position in Horizontal Scanning Direction
Details To adjust the image write start position in the Horizontal scanning direction
when picking up paper from the Cassette 2 (option Pickup Cassette).
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is in-
creased by 0.5 mm.
+: Left margin becomes larger (An image moves to the right.)
-: Left margin becomes smaller (An image moves to the left.)
When replacing the controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
Use case • When replacing the controller PCB
• When clearing the RAM
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press Apply.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.

172
8. Service Mode

COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ


ADJ-C2 Display/adj/set range -12 to 12
Unit Approx. 0.5 mm
Default value 0
ADJ-MF Write start position in the horizontal scanning direction at pickup from the multi-purpose Tray
Details To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction
when picking up paper from the Multi-purpose Tray.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is in-
creased by 0.5 mm.
+: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.)
-: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.)
When replacing the controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
Use case • When replacing the controller PCB
• When clearing the RAM
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press Apply.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/adj/set range -12 to 12
Unit Approx. 0.5 mm
Default value 0
ADJ-REFE Write start position in the horizontal scanning direction at 2-sided pickup
Details To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction at
2-sided pickup.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is in-
creased by 0.5 mm.
+: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.)
-: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.)
When replacing the controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
Use case • When replacing the controller PCB
• When clearing the RAM
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press Apply.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/adj/set range -12 to 12
Unit Approx. 0.5 mm
Default value 0
LOOP-CST Registration loop amount adjustment: cassette feeding
Details To adjust the registration loop amount in the cassette feeding.
The paper feeding distance is increased/decreased by changing the value.
+: The loop amount increases.
-: The loop amount decreases.
Use case • When replacing the controller PCB
• When the casette feeding paper is skewed
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press Apply.
Display/adj/set range -2 to 2
Unit 1.0 mm
Default value 0
LOOP-MF Registration loop amount adjustment: MP-feeding
Details To adjust the registration loop amount in the MP feeding.
The paper feeding distance is increased/decreased by changing the value.
+: The loop amount increases.
-: The loop amount decreases.
Use case • When replacing the controller PCB
• When the casette feeding paper is skewed
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press Apply.
Display/adj/set range -2 to 2
Unit 1.0 mm
Default value 0
LOOPREFE Registration loop amount adjustment: 2-sided feeding

173
8. Service Mode

COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ


LOOPREFE Details To adjust the registration loop amount in the 2-sided feeding.
The paper feeding distance is increased/decreased by changing the value.
+: The loop amount increases.
-: The loop amount decreases.
Use case • When replacing the controller PCB
• When the casette feeding paper is skewed
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press Apply.
Display/adj/set range -2 to 2
Unit 1.0 mm
Default value 0

■ FIXING
COPIER > ADJUST > FIXING
FX-FL-SP Adjustment of fixing film speed (Prevention of the stained trailing edge of paper)
Details To adjust the fixing film speed at the normal speed after the trailing edge of
paper passes the transfer nip.
As the value is incremented, the speed of the fixing motor becomes fast.
Use case When preventing the stained trailing edge of paper
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press Apply.
Display/adj/set range -15 to 15
Unit Approx. 0.4 %
Default value 0

■ LASER
COPIER > ADJUST > LASER
PVE-OFST Adjustment of write start position of laser
Details To adjust the image position by changing the laser emitting position.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image moves by 0.1 mm.
+: Toward the trailing edge
-: Toward the leading edge
Use case 1. When adjusting image position.
2. When replacing the controller PCB.
Adj/set/operate metho Enter the setting value and press Apply.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service
label.
Display/adj/set range -28 to 32
Unit 0.1mm
Default value 0

■ PANEL
COPIER > ADJUST > PANEL
TOUCHCHK Correction of coordinate position of Touch Panel
Detail To correct the coordinate on the Touch Panel.
Use Case When a problem occurs to the coordinate position in such a way that a po-
sition different from the one that was touched reacts.
At the time of Main controller PCB replace.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Touch the "+ (plus)" mark displayed on the Touch Panel with something with
a sharp tip such as a pen.

174
8. Service Mode

FUNCTION
■ CCD
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD
CCD-ADJ Adjustment of CIS gain/offset
Details To adjust the gain/offset of the CIS automatically.
Use case • When replacing the reader upper unit
• When replacing the CIS unit
• When replacing the controller PCB
Adj/set/operate method 1. Select the item, and then start adjustment.
2. The adjusted value reflect COPIER >DISPLAY > CCD> OFST(BW0 to BW5
and CL0 to CL5) and COPIER >DISPLAY > CCD> GAIN(BW0 to BW5, CL0
to CL5).
Required time 3 sec.
Related service mode COPIER> DISPLAY> CCD> OFST (BW0 to BW5 and CL0 to CL5)
COPIER> DISPLAY> CCD> GAIN (BW0 to BW5, CL0 to CL5)
DF-WLVL1 White level adjustment in book mode: (B&W)
Details To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by setting the
white paper
which is usually used by the user on the Copyboard Glass.
Use case • When replacing the reader upper unit
• When replacing the CIS unit
• When replacing the ADF/reader unit
Adj/set/operate method 1. Set paper on the Copyboard Glass.
2. Select the item, and then start adjustment.
Caution Be sure to execute DF-WLVL2 in a row.
Related service mode COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD > DFTAR-BW
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2
DF-WLVL2 White level adjustment in ADF mode: (B&W)
Details To adjust the white level for ADF scanning automatically by setting the white
paper which is usually used by the user on the ADF.
Use case • When replacing the reader upper unit
• When replacing the CIS unit
• When replacing the ADF/reader unit
Adj/set/operate method 1. Set paper on the ADF.
2. Select the item, and then start adjustment.
Caution Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL1.
Related service mode COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD > DFTAR-BW
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
Supplement/memo When this adjustment is finished normally, the result is reflected for COPIER>
DISPLAY> CCD> DFTAR-BW.
DF-WLVL3 White level adjustment in book mode: color
Details To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by setting the
white paper which is usually used by the user on the Copyboard Glass.
Use case • When replacing the reader upper unit
• When replacing the CIS unit
• When replacing the ADF/reader unit
Adj/set/operate method 1. Set paper on the Copyboard Glass.
2. Select the item, and then start adjustment.
Caution Be sure to execute DF-WLVL4 in a row.
Related service mode COPIER> DISPLAY > CCD > DFTAR-R / DFTAR-G / DFTAR-B
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4
DF-WLVL4 White level adjustment in ADF mode: color
Details To adjust the white level for ADF scanning automatically by setting the white
paper which is usually used by the user on the DADF.
Use case • When replacing the reader upper unit
• When replacing the CIS unit
• When replacing the ADF/reader unit

175
8. Service Mode

COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD


DF-WLVL4 Adj/set/operate method 1. Set paper on the ADF.
2. Select the item, and then start adjustment.
Caution Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL3.
Related service mode COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD > DFTAR-R / DFTAR-G / DFTAR-B
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3
Supplement/memo When this adjustment is finished normally, the result is reflected for COPIER>
DISPLAY> CCD> DFTAR-R / DFTAR-G / DFTAR-B.

■ CLEAR
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR
ERR Clear of error code
Details To clear error codes (E000, E001, E002, E003)
Use case At error occurrence
Adj/set/operate method 1. Enter the setting value, and then press START Key.
2. Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
R-CON Initialization of Reader/ADF adjustment values
Details To initialize the factory adjustment values of the Reader/ADF.
Use case When replacing the controller PCB
At E248-0001 error occurrence
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press START Key.
COUNTER Clearing of service counter
Details To clear the counter by maintenance / part/mode.
The numerator printed on a system dump list becomes 0.
Adj/set/operate method 1. START Key.
2. Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
HIST Clear of logs
Details To clear the communication management / print / jam / error log.
Use case When clearing logs
Adj/set/operate method 1. START Key.
2. Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
ALL Clearing setting information
Details Clear/initialize the following setting information according to the location set
in COPIER > OPTION > BODY > LOCALE, SIZE-LC:
• User mode setting values
• Service mode setting values (excluding service counter)
• ID and password of the system administrator
• Communication management / printing / jam / error history
• E719-CLR (counter meter-installed models only)
The following is not initialized:
• Service counter
• Factory adjustment values of the Reader / ADF
Use case At the time of Main controller board replace.
Adj/set/operate method 1. START Key.
2. Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Related service mode COPIER > OPTION > BODY > LOCALE/SIZE-LC
ERDS-DAT Initialization of Embedded-RDS setting value
Details To initialize the Embedded-RDS setting values.
ON / OFF of Embedded-RDS, UGW (remote monitoring service system)
port number, and communication error log set in service mode are initial-
ized.
Use case When upgrading the version of Bootable in the Embedded-RDS environ-
ment
Adj/set/operate method START Key.
Use of the SRAM in Embedded-RDS differs depending on the Bootable
version. Therefore, unless initialization is executed at the time of version
upgrade, data inconsistency occurs.

176
8. Service Mode

COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR


ERDS-DAT Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > ERDS
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > RGW-PORT
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > COM-LOG

■ MISC-R
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R
SCANLAMP   Light-up check of CIS Unit LED
Details To light up CIS Unit LED for 5 seconds.
Light up four difference color LED in order.
Use case When replacing the CIS Unit
Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then light up the LED.
Required time Approx. 5 seconds
Supplement/memo When you cannot confirm light for low light quantity, remove the reader
upper unit.

■ MISC-P
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P
SRVC-DAT Output of system data list/system dump list
Details To execute report output of the system data list and the system dump list.
System data list: The service software switches and parameters used in FAX function
System dump list:
The number of sends/receives, the number of pages sent/received, the number of sheets
printed / read, the number of errors, etc.
Adj/set/operate method Select the item.
SYS-DAT Output of system data list
Details To execute report output of the system data list.
The service software switches and parameters used in FAX function are output.
Adj/set/operate method Select the item.
SYS-DMP Output of system dump list
Details To execute report output of the system dump list.
The number of sends/receives, the number of pages sent/received, the number of sheets
printed/read, the number of errors, etc. are output.
Adj/set/operate method Select the item.
CNTR   Output of counter report
Details To output the counter report.
The usage of functions (reading, recording, communication and copy) is output.
Use case When the counter report is output
Adj/set/operate method Select the item.
ERR-LOG   Output of error log report
Details To output the error log report.
Use case When the error log report is output
Adj/set/operate method Select the item.
SPEC   Output of spec report
Details To output the spec report.
The current device specifications such as the location, model information, and ROM ver-
sion are output.
Use case When the spec report is output
Adj/set/operate method Select the item.
ERDS-LOG Output of Embedded-RDS log
Details To execute report output of the log relating to Embedded-RDS.
The date, time, code, and details (up to 130 characters) of each error that occurred are
output.
Use case When using Embedded-RDS
Adj/set/operate method Select the item.
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> COM-LOG

177
8. Service Mode

COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P


ERDS-LOG Supplement/memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure,
and consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol
UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system
KEY-HIST Output of key log report
Details To output the key log report.
Use case When the key log report is output
Adj/set/operate method Select the item

■ SYSTEM
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM
DOWNLOAD    Shift to download mode
Details To switch to the download mode.
Use case At upgrade
Adj/set/operate meth- 1. Select the item.
od 2. Perform downloading by UST.
Related user mode Settings/Registration> System Management Settings> Update Firmware

■ SPLMAN
COPIER > FUNCTION > SPLMAN
SPL93822   Setting of department ID count all clear
Details To set whether to disable clearing of all department ID counts.
Use case When preventing the count value from being cleared carelessly
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution Be sure to perform this mode after consulting with the system administrator at user's site.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: Enabled (Display), 1: Disabled (Hide)
Default value 0
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SPLMAN> SPL78788
SPL78788   Setting of department ID count clear
Details To set whether to disable clearing of department ID count.
Use case When preventing the count value from being cleared carelessly
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution Be sure to perform this mode after consulting with the system administrator at user's site.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: Enabled (Display), 1: Disabled (Hide)
Default value 0
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SPLMAN> SPL93822
SPL00171   Change of the maximum value of auto sleep shift time
Details To change the maximum value of auto sleep shift time in Settings/Registration> Timer
Settings> Auto Sleep Time.
Use case When changing the setting time to shift to auto sleep mode.
Adj/set/operate method 1. Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: 0 to 60, 1: 0 to 240
Default value 0 (For Europe), 1 (For locations other than Europe)
SPL84194 ON / OFF of E-RDS function
Details ON / OFF of E-RDS function
Use case OFF of E-RDS function
Adj/set/operate method 1. Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Default value 0

178
8. Service Mode

COPIER > FUNCTION > SPLMAN


SPL27354 PC-less update, RMDS environment setting
Details PC-less update, RMDS environment setting
Use case PC-less update, RMDS environment setting
Adj/set/operate method 1. Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range 0: Production environment / Release environment
1: Production environment / Staging environment
2: Maintenance environment 1 / Release environment
3: Maintenance environment 1 / Staging environment
4: Maintenance environment 2 / Release environment
5: Maintenance environment 2 / Staging environment
Default value 0
SPL32620 Switching to enable / disable PC-less update
Details To switch whether to enable the PC-less update function.
Use case To switch whether to enable the PC-less update function.
Adj/set/operate method 1. Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled (default)
Default value 1
SPL60061 Switching to display the connection destination URL setting of GoogleCloudPrint on the remote UI
Details To display the connection destination URL setting of GoogleCloudPrint on the remote UI.
Use case To display the connection destination URL setting of GoogleCloudPrint on the remote UI.
Adj/set/operate method 1. Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: Do not display
1: Display
Default value 0

■ INSTALL
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL
STRD-POS Scan position auto adjustment in ADF mode
Details To adjust the ADF scanning position automatically.
Carry it out in the state that ADF was closed.
The adjustment result is stored in COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> STRD-POS.
When this adjustment failed, the default value is stored.
Execute continuously COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1/DF-WLVL2/DF-
WLVL3/DF-WLVL4 after this item setting.
Use case At ADF installation/uninstallation
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then start adjustment. The operation automatically stops after the
adjustment.
2) Write the value displayed by COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>STRD-POS in the service label.
3) Execute continuously COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1/DF-WLVL2/DF-WLVL3/
DF-WLVL4.
Caution Write the adjusted value in the service label.
When COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1/DF-WLVL2/DF-WLVL3/DF-WLVL4 is not
continuously executed after this item setting, a normal image may not be output.
Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1/DF-WLVL2/DF-WLVL3/DF-WLVL4
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS
ERDS Embedded-RDS ON/OFF
Details To set ON / OFF of Embedded-RDS function.
Use case When using Embedded-RDS
Adj/set/operate method 1. Select the item, and then press Apply key.
2. Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Caution Be sure to use ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, and COM-LOG as a set.

179
8. Service Mode

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL


ERDS Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0 : OFF 1 : ON
Default value 0
Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL >
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > RGW-PORT
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > COM-TEST
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > COM-RSLT
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > COM-LOG
Supplement/memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol
UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system
RGW-PORT Setting of UGW port number when using Embedded-RDS
Details To set the port number of UGW to be used for Embedded-RDS.
Use case When using Embedded-RDS
Adj/set/operate method 1. Select the item, and then press Apply key.
2. Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Caution Be sure to use ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, and COM-LOG as a set.
Display/adj/set range 1 to 65535
Default value 443
Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > ERDS
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > COM-TEST
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > COM-RSLT
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > COM-LOG
Supplement/memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol
UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system
COM-TEST Execution of Embedded-RDS communication test
Details To display the result of the connection test with the sales company's server.
Use case When using E-RDS
Adj/set/operate method Press Start key.
Caution Be sure to use ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, and COM-LOG as a set.
Display/adj/set range During operation: ACTIVE, When connection is completed: OK, When connection is failed:
NG
Default value Non
Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > ERDS
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > RGW-PORT
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > COM-RSLT
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > COM-LOG
Supplement/memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol
UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system
COM-RSLT Embedded-RDS communication test result
Details To display the Embedded-RDS communication test result.
Use case When using E-RDS
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Caution Be sure to use ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, and COM-LOG as a set.
Display/adj/set range When not in execution : Unknown, When connection is completed : OK, When connection is
failed : Fail
Default value Unknown
Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > ERDS
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > RGW-PORT
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > COM-TEST
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > COM-LOG
Supplement/memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol
UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system
COM-LOG Embedded-RDS communication error log
Details To display the Embedded-RDS communication error log. The dates, times, and error codes
of the latest 5 errors that occurred are displayed. As for the error detail information, the report
can be output by executing COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > ERDS-LOG.

180
8. Service Mode

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL


COM-LOG Use case When using Embedded-RDS
Adj/set/operate method Non
Caution Be sure to use ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, and COM-LOG as a set.
Display/adj/set range Date : 6 digits Time : 4 digits Error code : 8 digits
Default value Non
Related service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > ERDS
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > RGW-PORT
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > COM-TEST
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > COM-RSLT
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > ERDS-LOG
Supplement/memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol
UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system

■ PART-CHK
COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK
MTR-ON Roller cleaning mode
Details To clean the rollers by driving the main motor.
The delivery roller and the multi-purpose tray pickup roller are driven.
The motor operates for approximately 25 seconds and automatically stops.
Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then start driving.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Default value 0

OPTION
■ BODY
COPIER > OPTION > BODY
RTLG-SEL For R&D
DFDST-L1    ADF mode dust correction level adjustment: paper interval
Details To adjust black line correction level with very small dust correction control that is executed
at paper interval in ADF mode by brightness.
As the value is smaller, the dust is less detected.
Increase the value in the case of black lines.
As the value is larger, the dust that the color is light is more likely detected.
Use case - When black line occurs due to dust
- Upon user's request
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply.
Caution When reducing the value too much, black lines may appear on the image.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 255
Default value 130
DFDST-L2    ADF mode dust detection level adjustment: after job
Details To adjust dust detection level with dust detection control that is executed after the job is
completed in DADF mode by brightness.
Reduce the value in the case of frequent display of cleaning instruction at the time of dust
detection. As the value is smaller, the dust is less detected.
Increase the value in the case of black lines.
As the value is larger, the dust that the color is light is more likely detected.
Use case When black line occurs due to dust - Upon user's request
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply.
Caution When increasing the value too much, the cleaning instruction screen may appear too often
since even small dust that will not be appeared on the image can be detected.
When releasing the cleaning screen after the setting value was smaller, the glass cleaning
or ADF open/close must be perfomed.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 255

181
8. Service Mode

COPIER > OPTION > BODY


DFDST-L2    Default value 100
Related user mode Setting Menu > Adjustment/Maintenance > Auto Correct for Dirt on Scanning Area
LOCALE    Setting of location
Details To set the location.
At installation in areas other than Japan, perform the following procedure to match the setting
information with that of the location.
Use case • At installation
• When replacing the controller PCB
• When changing the location information
Adj/set/operate method 1. Enter the setting value under LOCALE, and then press Apply.
2. Set the paper size configuration under SIZE-LC.
3. Execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ALL.
4. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Since COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ALL is executed when changing the location, the
setting information of user mode, service mode, etc. is initialized.
The setting information of this item is not initialized.
Display/adj/set range 1 to 8
1: Japan, 2: North America, 3: Korea, 4: China, 5: Taiwan, 6: Europe, 7: Asia, 8: Oceania
Default value 1
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ALL
COPIER> OPTION> BODY> SIZE-LC
SIZE-LC    Setting of paper size configuration
Details To set the paper size configuration.
At installation in areas other than Japan, perform the following procedure to match the setting
information with that of the location.
Use case • At installation
• When replacing the controller PCB
• Upon user's request
Adj/set/operate method 1. Set the location under LOCALE.
2. Enter the setting value under SIZE-LC, and then press Apply.
3. Execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ALL.
4. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Since COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ALL is executed when changing the location, the
setting information of user mode, service mode, etc. is initialized.
The setting information of this item is not initialized.
Display/adj/set range 1 to 3
1: AB configuration, 2: Inch configuration, 3: A configuration
Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ALL
COPIER> OPTION> BODY> LOCALE
MIBCOUNT Setting of MIB collection charge counter
   Details To set the range of charge counter information that can obtain MIB (Management Information
Base).
Use case When preventing the Charge Counter MIB from being used by a third party
Adj/set/operate method 1. Enter the setting value, and then press Apply.
2. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 2
0: All charge counters are obtained, 1: Only the displayed counter* is obtained, 2: All charge
counters are not obtained
* : Counter specified by the following: COPIER > OPTION > USER > COUNTER 1 to 6
Default value 0
Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> COUNTER1 to 6
SDTM-DSP    Automatic shutdown setting
Details To set whether to display "Auto Shutdown Time" in the menu.
Use case For customization
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution Automatic shutdown function is enabled only when there is no fax connection and the con-
troller which supports the function is connected.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display

182
8. Service Mode

COPIER > OPTION > BODY


SDTM-DSP    Default value Europe (model without fax): 1, Others: 0
Related user mode Menu > Timer Settings > Auto Shutdown Time
TR-BS-SW    Setting of transfer bias highland environment mode
Details To control the transfer bias in printing so that it does not exceed a specified level
Use case When the black spots appear on the image (caused by leak occurs at high latitude)
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply.
Caution When the installation site is changed from a highland to a lowland, set this mode OFF.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 2
0: OFF, 1/2: ON
Default value 0
SC-PR-SW    Setting of scanner last rotation time
Details To stop the polygon motor immediately after the last rotation so that a noise of the polygon
motor is reduced
Use case When receiving a complaint about the scanner motor drive noise after a job is finished.
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value 0
FLK-RD    Flicker reduction mode
Details To change the fixing temperature control to cancel fluorescent flicking during printing.
Use case When the fluorescent flicking occurs during printing.
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value 0
FIX-OFST    Change of detection temperature for the fixing edge temperature
Details Lower the detection temperature of the fixing sub thermistor to shift the machine control to
the slow down sequence for small size papers (less than B5 of length in width direction) .
Use case When an abnormal sound occurs in the fixing film unit.
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value 0
TEMPCON2 Set fixing control temperature table: Plain paper mode
   Details To change the fixing control temperature in the plain paper mode (plain paper, color paper,
recycled paper, pre-punched paper, Transparency).
Use case When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the plain paper mode.
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply.
Display/adj/set range -6 to 6 (-30 deg C to 30 deg C)
Unit 5 deg C
Default value 0
TEMP-CON Set fixing control temperature table: Heavy paper mode
   Details To change the fixing control temperature in the heavy paper mode (heavy paper 1, heavy
paper 2, bond, transparency, envelope).
Use case When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in theheavy paper mode.
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply.
Display/adj/set range -6 to 6 (-30 deg C to 30 deg C)
Unit 5 deg C
Default value 0
FX-CN-SW    Setting break of fixing pressure roller cleaning sequence
Details To set break the fixing pressure roller cleaning sequence
Use case Upon user's request (When the fixing motor sound which is generated in the fixing pressure
roller cleaning sequence is claimed from user)
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply.

183
8. Service Mode

COPIER > OPTION > BODY


FX-CN-SW    Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default value 0
TMP-TB15    2-sided curl correction mode
Details To change the fixing temperature to correct the curl in 2-sided print (high temperature / high
humidity environment, palin paper or special mode P)
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 6
0: OFF , 1 to 6: ON
Default value 0
SP-SW    Setting of the separation bias
Details To improve the separation performance by changing separation bias.
Use case When using the thin paper of the out of specification.
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply.
Caution When using the plain paper, turn off the setting.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 2
0: OFF, 1: Separation bias down, 2: Separation bias up
Default value 0
CLN-SW    Black band mode
Details To prevent the image smear in the high humidity, the cleaning ability of the drum surface is
raised by this mode and the deteriorated toner is removed. When the value is increased, the
effect becomes big.
Use case When the image smear occurs.
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply.
Caution The toner consumption is increased and it influences the dirt of the transfer roller.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 3
Appropriate target value 0 to 3
0: default (no black band)
1: The making of the black band at the last rotation for 75 sheets once
2: The making of the black band at the last rotation for 50 sheets once
3: The making of the black band at the last rotation for 25 sheets once
Default value 0
SCANSLCT Selection of reference at reading of originals
   Details To select the size reference at reading of originals.
Use case When changing the reference for reading
Adj/set/operate method 1. Enter the setting value, and then press Apply.
2. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution There is no automatic rotation when the setting value is 1.
When a mode is specified that requires specification of the original size (such as enlarged
layout, reduced layout), scanning is performed with reference to the original size.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: Scan with reference to original size, 1: Scan with reference to recording paper size
Default value 0
WT-LT-SW    Selection of display when the waste toner is full
Details To select the message display when the waste toner in the drum unit becomes full.
Use case When changing the waste toner full message
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: Error display (E019 display), 1: Display of a message to prompt drum replacement
Default value EUR: 1, Others: 0

■ FNC-SW
COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW
T-DLV-BK   Set toner low alarm notice timing
Details Set timing of the toner low alarm. When the toner level in the Toner
Container reaches to the setting value (%), the alarm is notified.

184
8. Service Mode

COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW
T-DLV-BK   Use case When changing the timing to notify the end of life.
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and then press Apply.
Caution Count error may occur as remaining toner is calculate by toner supply count.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 40
Unit %
Default value LATIN, EUR : 0, Others : 23

■ USER
COPIER > OPTION > USER
COUNTER1 Display of counter 1 type
   Details To display counter type for counter 1 on the counter check screen.
Use case Upon user/dealer's request
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
Caution No change is available.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 999
0: No registration
Default value The value differs according to the location.
COUNTER2 Display of counter 2 type
   Details To display counter type for counter 2 on the counter check screen.
Use case Upon user/dealer's request
Adj/set/operate method 1. Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 999
0: No registration
Default value The value differs according to the location.
COUNTER3 Display of counter 3 type
   Details To display counter type for counter 3 on the counter check screen.
Use case Upon user/dealer's request
Adj/set/operate method 1. Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 999
0: No registration
Default value The value differs according to the location.
COUNTER4 Display of counter 4 type
   Details To display counter type for counter 4 on the counter check screen.
Use case Upon user/dealer's request
Adj/set/operate method 1. Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 999
0: No registration
Default value 0
COUNTER5 Display of counter 5 type
   Details To display counter type for counter 5 on the counter check screen.
Use case Upon user/dealer's request
Adj/set/operate method 1. Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 999
0: No registration
Default value 0
COUNTER6 Display of counter 6 type
   Details To display counter type for counter 6 on the Counter Check screen.
Use case Upon user/dealer's request
Adj/set/operate method 1. Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.

185
8. Service Mode

COPIER > OPTION > USER


COUNTER6 Display/adj/set range 0 to 999
   0: No registration
Default value 0
CNT-SW    Setting of charge counter display method
Details To set display method of the charge counter on the Counter Check screen.
Set 1 to 3 to select a new method.
Use case Upon user's request
Adj/set/operate method 1. Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 3
0: type1, 1: type2, 2: type3, 3: type4
Default value 0
B4-L-CNT    Count setting of B4 size
Details To set B4 count with software counter 1 to 6 as to whether B4 is counted as large size or
small size.
Selecting 1 counts B4 or larger size paper as large size while paper smaller than B4 size
as small size.
Use case Upon user's request
Adj/set/operate method 1. Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: Small size, 1: Large size
Default value 0
CTCHKDSP ON/OFF of charge counter print
   Details To set whether to display or hide [Copy/Print Charge Log Report] in [Menu]>[Output Re-
ports]>[Print List].
Use case Upon user's request
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value 1
Related user mode Menu > Output Reports > Print List > Copy/Print Charge Log Report
TNRB-SW ON/OFF of toner replacement counter display
Details To set whether to display the toner replacement counter on the Counter Check screen.
When 1 is set, the user can check the toner replacement counter.
Use case Upon user's request
Adj/set/operate method 1. Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0 : Hide the Toner Bottle / Unidentified Toner Bottle replacement counter
1 : Display the Toner Bottle replacement counter
Default value 0

■ ACC
COPIER > OPTION > ACC
WLAN Title Setting of wireless LAN invalidation
Details To set whether to disable the wireless LAN.
Bringing in and installation of the wireless LAN equipment may be prohibited depending
on user.
In such case, set 0 to prevent the wireless LAN to be used.
When 0 is set, [Wirless LAN Settings] is not displayed in [Menu > Network Settings].
Use case Upon user's request
Adj/set/operate method 1. Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

186
8. Service Mode

COPIER > OPTION > ACC


WLAN Default value 1

COUNTER
■ TOTAL
COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL
SERVICE1   Service-purposed total counter 1
Details To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine.
Large size: 1, small size: 1
Attention in the use When numerical value exceeds 99,999,999, it return to 0.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of sheets
Default value 0
SERVICE2   Service-purposed total counter 2
Details To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine.
Large size: 2, small size: 1
Attention in the use When numerical value exceeds 99,999,999, it return to 0.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of sheets
Default value 0
TTL   Total counter
Details To display the total of counters of copy, PDL print, report print. (Total of
COPY, PDL-PRT, RPT-PRT in service mode described below)
Attention in the use When numerical value exceeds 99,999,999, it return to 0.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of sheets
Default value 0
Related service mode COPIER> COUNTER> TOTAL> COPY, PDL-PRT, RPT-PRT
COPY   Total copy counter
Details To count up when the copy is delivered outside the machine.
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is not advanced by delivery in service mode.
Attention in the use When numerical value exceeds 99,999,999, it return to 0.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of sheets
Default value 0
Related service mode COPIER> COUNTER> TOTAL> TTL
PDL-PRT   PDL print counter
Details To count up when the PDL print is delivered outside the machine/2-sided
printout is stacked.
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is not advanced by blank paper or delivery in service mode.
Attention in the use When numerical value exceeds 99,999,999, it return to 0.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of sheets
Default value 0
Related service mode COPIER> COUNTER> TOTAL> TTL
FAX-PRT FAX reception print counter
Details To count up when the FAX reception print is delivered outside the machine/
2-sided printout is stacked.
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is not advanced by blank paper or delivery in service mode.
Attention in the use When numerical value exceeds 99,999,999, it return to 0.
FAX model only.

187
8. Service Mode

COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL


FAX-PRT Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of sheets
Default value 0
Related service mode COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL > TTL
RPT-PRT   Report print counter
Details To count up when the report print is delivered outside the machine/2-sided
printout is stacked.
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is not advanced by blank paper or delivery in service mode.
Attention in the use When numerical value exceeds 99,999,999, it return to 0.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of sheets
Related service mode COPIER> COUNTER> TOTAL> TTL
2-SIDE   2-sided copy/print counter
Details To count up the number of 2-sided copies/prints when the copy/printout is
delivered outside the machine/2-sided copy/printout is stacked.
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is not advanced by blank paper or delivery in service mode.
Attention in the use When numerical value exceeds 99,999,999, it return to 0.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of times
Default value 0
SCAN   Scan counter
Details To count up the number of scan operations when the scanning operation is
complete.
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is not advanced by delivery in service mode.
Attention in the use When numerical value exceeds 99,999,999, it return to 0.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of times
Default value 0

■ PICK-UP
COPIER > COUNTER > PICK-UP
C1   Cassette 1 pickup total counter
Details To count up the number of sheets picked up from the cassette 1.
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is advanced by printout in service mode.
Attention in the use When numerical value exceeds 99,999,999, It return to 0.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of sheets
Default value 0
C2   Cassette 2 pickup total counter
Details To count up the number of sheets picked up from the cassette 2.
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is advanced by printout in service mode.
Attention in the use When numerical value exceeds 99,999,999, It return to 0.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of sheets
Default value 0
MF   Multi-purpose tray pickup total counter
Details To count up the number of sheets picked up from the Multi-purpose tray pickup unit.
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is advanced by printout in service mode.
Attention in the use When numerical value exceeds 99,999,999, It return to 0.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999

188
8. Service Mode

COPIER > COUNTER > PICK-UP


MF   Unit Number of sheets
Default value 0
2-SIDE   2-sided pickup total counter
Details To count up the number of sheets picked up in duplex mode.
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is advanced by printout in service mode.
Attention in the use When numerical value exceeds 99,999,999, It return to 0.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of sheets
Default value 0

■ FEEDER
COPIER > COUNTER > FEEDER
FEED    ADF original pickup total counter
Details To count up the number of originals picked up from the ADF.
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
Attention in the use When numerical value exceeds 99,999,999, It return to 0.
Use case When checking the total counter of original pickup by ADF.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of sheets
Default value 0

■ JAM
COPIER > COUNTER > JAM
TOTAL Printer total jam counter
Details To count up the number of total jam occurrences.
Attention in the use When numerical value exceeds 99,999,999, It return to 0.
Use case When checking the total jam counter of printer
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of times
Default value 0
FEEDER ADF total jam counter
Details When checking the total jam counter of ADF
Attention in the use When numerical value exceeds 99,999,999, It return to 0.
Use case When checking the total jam counter of ADF
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of times
Default value 0
2-SIDE Duplex unit jam counter
Details To count up the number of jam occurrences in the Duplex Unit.
Attention in the use When numerical value exceeds 99,999,999, It return to 0.
Use case When checking the jam counter of Duplex Unit
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of times
Default value 0
MF Multi-purpose tray jam counter
Details To count up the number of jam occurrences in the multi-purpose tray Pickup
Unit.
The counter is advanced by paper size mismatch or misprint.
Attention in the use When numerical value exceeds 99,999,999, It return to 0.
Use case When checking the jam counter of Multi-purpose tray
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of times

189
8. Service Mode

COPIER > COUNTER > JAM


MF Default value 0
C1 Cassette 1 pickup jam counter
Details To count up the number of jam occurrences in the cassette 1.
Attention in the use When numerical value exceeds 99,999,999, It return to 0.
Use case The counter is advanced by paper size mismatch or misprint.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of times
Default value 0
C2 Cassette 2 pickup jam counter
Details To count up the number of jam occurrences in the cassette 2.
Attention in the use When numerical value exceeds 99,999,999, It return to 0.
Use case The counter is advanced by paper size mismatch or misprint.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of times
Default value 0

■ DRBL-1
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1
PT-DRM Drum parts counter
Details Total counter value from the previous replacement
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value
1. Press Reset Key for "0".
2. Pless Apply.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of Sheets
Default value 0
C1-PU-RL Cassette 1 Pickup Roller parts counter
Details Total counter value from the previous replacement
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value
1. Press Reset Key for "0".
2. Pless Apply.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of Sheets
Default value 0
C1-SP-RL Cassette 1 Separation Pad parts counter
Details Total counter value from the previous replacement
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value
1. Press Reset Key for "0".
2. Pless Apply.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of Sheets
Default value 0
M-PU-RL Multi-purpose tray pickup parts counter
Details Total counter value from the previous replacement
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value
1. Press Reset Key for "0".
2. Pless Apply.

190
8. Service Mode

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1


M-PU-RL Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of Sheets
Default value 0
FX-UNIT Fixing Unit parts counter
Details Total counter value from the previous replacement
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value
1. Press Reset Key for "0".
2. Pless Apply.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of Sheets
Default value 0
DV-UNT-K Developing Unit parts counter
Details Total counter value from the previous replacement
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value
1. Press Reset Key for "0".
2. Pless Apply.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of Sheets
Default value 0
M-SP-PD Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad prts counter
Details Total counter value from the previous replacement
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value
1. Press Reset Key for "0".
2. Pless Apply.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of Sheets
Default value 0
TR-ROLL Transfer Roller parts counter
Details Total counter value from the previous replacement
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value
1. Press Reset Key for "0".
2. Pless Apply.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of Sheets
Default value 0

■ DRBL-2
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2
C2-SP-RL Cassette 2 Separation Roller prts counter
Details Total counter value from the previous replacement
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value
1. Press Reset Key for "0" .
2. Pless Apply.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999

191
8. Service Mode

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2


C2-SP-RL Unit Number of Sheets
Default value 0
C2-FD-RL Cassette 2 Feed Roller parts counter
Details Total counter value from the previous replacement
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value
1. Press Reset Key for "0" .
2. Pless Apply.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of Sheets
Default value 0
DF-SP-PD Separation Pad parts counter: DADF
Details Total counter value from the previous replacement
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value
1. Press Reset Key for "0" .
2. Pless Apply.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of Sheets
Default value 0
DF-PU-RL Pickup Roller parts counter: DADF
Details Total counter value from the previous replacement
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value
1. Press Reset Key for "0" .
2. Pless Apply.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of Sheets
Default value 0
LNT-TAPE Feed Guide(Dust Colct Tape)prts cntr:DADF
Details Total counter value from the previous replacement
Use case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value
1. Press Reset Key for "0" .
2. Pless Apply.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of Sheets
Default value 0

192
8. Service Mode

FEEDER

ADJUST
FEEDER > ADJUST
DOCST Adjustment of ADF image leading edge margin [front side]
Details To adjust the margin at the leading edge of the image for ADF scanning the
front side of original with ADF.
Execute when the output image after ADF installation is dislocated.
When replacing the controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin at the leading edge of the image
is decreased by 0.1mm. (The image moves in the direction of the leading edge
of the sheet.)
Use case • When installing ADF
• When replacing the controller PCB/ clearing RAM data
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press Apply.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/adj/set range -50 to 50
Unit 0.1 mm
Default value 0
LA-SPD Fine adjustment of magnification ratio in horizontal scanning direction at ADF stream reading [front side]
Details To make a fine adjustment of the image magnification ratio in vertical scanning
direction when stream reading the front side of original with ADF.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.1% in vertical
scanning direction. (The feeding speed increases, and the image is reduced.)
Use case • When installing ADF
• When replacing the controller PCB/ clearing RAM data
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press Apply.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/adj/set range -30 to 30
Unit 0.10%
Default value 0
DOCST2 Adjustment of ADF image leading edge margin [back side]
Details To adjust the margin at the leading edge of the image when stream reading the
back side of original with ADF.
Execute when the output image after ADF installation is dislocated.
When replacing the controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin at the leading edge of the image
is decreased by 0.1mm. (The image moves in the direction of the leading edge
of the sheet.)
Use case • When installing ADF
• When replacing the controller PCB/ clearing RAM data

Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press Apply.


Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/adj/set range -50 to 50
Unit 0.1 mm
Default value 0
DOCST-R Fine adjustment of trailing edge at ADF reading
Details To make a fine adjustment of trailing edge when reading original with ADF.
Execute when the output image after ADF installation is displaced.
When replacing the controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin at the trailing edge of the image
is decreased by 0.1mm. (The image do not move and only the margin at the
trailing edge of the image changes.)
Use case • When installing ADF
• When replacing the controller PCB/ clearing RAM data
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press Apply.

193
8. Service Mode

FEEDER > ADJUST


DOCST-R Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/adj/set range -30 to 30
Unit 0.1 mm
Default value 0
LA-SPD2 Fine adjustment of magnification ratio at ADF stream reading [back side]
Details To make a fine adjustment of the image magnification ratio in vertical scanning
direction when stream reading the back side of original with ADF.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.1% in vertical
scanning direction. (The feeding speed increases, and the image is reduced.)
Use case • When installing ADF
• When replacing the controller PCB/ clearing RAM data
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press Apply.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/adj/set range -30 to 30
Unit 0.10%
Default value 0

FUNCTION
FEEDER > FUNCTION
MTR-CHK Specifying ADF operation motor
Details To specify the ADF Motor to operate.
The motor is activated by MTR-ON.
Use case • At operation check
• When replacing the motor
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: ADF pickup motor (M2), 1: ADF feed motor (M1)
Default value 0
Related service mode FEEDER > FUNCTION > MTR-ON
MTR-ON Operation check of ADF motor
Details To start operation check for the motor specified by MTR-CHK.
The unit operates for approximately 5 seconds and automatically stops.
Use case • At operation check
• When replacing the motor
Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then start driving.
Required time Approx. 5 seconds
Related service mode FEEDER > FUNCTION > MTR-CHK
FEED-ON Operation check of ADF individual feed
Details To start operation check of the ADF individual feed in the mode specified by
FEEDCHK.
Use case At operation check
Adj/set/operate method 1. Set paper on the ADF.
2. Select the item, and then start feeding .
Related service mode FEEDER > FUNCTION > FEED-CHK
FEED-CHK Setting of ADF individual feed mode
Details To set the ADF feed mode.
Feed operation is activated in the specified feed mode by executing FEED-
ON.
Use case At operation check
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: 1-sided, 1: 2-sided
Default value 0
Related service mode FEEDER > FUNCTION > FEED-ON

194
8. Service Mode

FEEDER > FUNCTION


SL-CHK Operation check of ADF solenoid
Details To set the ADF solenoid.
Solenoid is activated by executing SL-ON.
Use case • At operation check
• When replacing the solenoid
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply.
Display/adj/set range 0: Roller release solenoid (SL1)
Default value 0
Related service mode FEEDER > FUNCTION > SL-ON
SL-ON Operation check of ADF solenoid
Details To start operation check for the solenoid specified by SL-CHK.
The unit operates for 1 time and automatically stops.
Use case • At operation check
• When replacing the solenoid
Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Related service mode FEEDER > FUNCTION > SL-CHK
ROLL-CLN Rotation of ADF rollers
Details To rotate for cleaning the ADF Rollers.
Clean the roller by putting the lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while it
is rotating.
The operation automatically stops after approximately 5 seconds.
Use case At roller cleaning
Adj/set/operate method 1. Select the item, and then start rotating.
2. Clean the rotating rollers with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
Required time Approx. 5 seconds

195
8. Service Mode

FAX

List of SSSW
FAX model only

FAX > SSSW


SSSW No. Bit No. Function
SW 01 (Errors, COPY functions)
Bit 0 Output error codes for service technicians
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
SW 02 (Setting for network connection criteria)
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4 V34 CCRTN OFF
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7 Connect the terminal as F network type 2
SW 03 (Echo measures)
Bit 0 Check EQM of TCF
Bit 1 Apply echo protect tone to V.29
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7 Output 1080Hz before CED
SW 04 (Measures against communication troubles)
Bit 0 Monitor LC
Bit 1 Check CI signal frequency
Bit 2 V21 end flag
Bit 3 Prohibit T.30 node F kept by both parties
Bit 4 T.30 node F echo timer
Bit 5 Check CI signal frequency when setting PBX
Bit 6 Do not send CNG for manual outgoing transmission
Bit 7 Do not send CED for manual incoming transmission
SW 05 (Standard functions, DIS signal setting)
Bit 0
Bit 1 mm/inch conversion (text mode)
Bit 2 mm/inch conversion (text and picture / picture mode)
Bit 3 Prohibit DIS from transmitting bit33 and the followings.
Bit 4 Declare cut sheets
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
SW 06 (Setting of reading criteria)

196
8. Service Mode

FAX > SSSW


SW 06 Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4 Reading width 0:A4 1: LTR
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
SW 07 Not in use
SW 08 Not in use
SW 09 Not in use
SW 10 Not in use
SW 11 Not in use
SW 12 (Page timer setting)
Bit 0 1 page timeout (outgoing transmission)
Bit 1
Bit 2 1 page timeout (HT transmission)
Bit 3
Bit 4 1 page timeout (incoming transmission)
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7 1 page timeout
SW 13
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2 Convert mm/inch when transmitting received image
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
SW 14
Bit 0 <NADA>COPIER > OPTION > BODY > MODEL-SZ
Bit 1
Bit 2 Convert inch to mm in both main/vertical scanning directions or only in vertical scanning di-
rection
Bit 3
Bit 4 Declare resolution for Inch series
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
SW 15 Not in use
SW 16 Not in use
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4 Allow/prohibit divided recording to the same paper configuration ratio.
Bit 5 Allow/prohibit margin recording to the same paper configuration ratio.
Bit 6 Allow/prohibit reduction recording to the different paper configuration ratio.
Bit 7 Allow/prohibit margin recording to the different paper configuration ratio.
SW 17 Not in use
SW 18
Bit 0 Detect carrier disconnection between DCS and TCF

197
8. Service Mode

FAX > SSSW


SW 18 Bit 1 Waiting time for carrier disconnection between DCS and TCF
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
SW 19 Not in use
SW 20 Not in use
SW 21 Not in use
SW 22
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3 Prohibit manual polling actions
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
SW 23 Not in use
SW 24 Not in use
SW 25 (Setting for report display function)
Bit 0 Prioritize the received telephone number to the dialed number
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
SW 26 Not in use
SW 27 Not in use
SW 28
Bit 0 Prohibit calling party for V8 procedure
Bit 1 Prohibit called party from V8 procedure
Bit 2 Prohibit calling party from V8 late-start
Bit 3 Prohibit called party from V8 late-start
Bit 4 Prohibit V.34 called party from starting fallback
Bit 5 Prohibit V.34 calling party from starting fallback
Bit 6
Bit 7
SW 29 Not in use
SW 30
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5 New dial tone detection method
Bit 6
Bit 7
SW 31 Not in use
SW 32 Not in use
SW 33 Not in use

198
8. Service Mode

FAX > SSSW


SW 34 Not in use
SW 35 Not in use
SW 36 Not in use
SW 37 Not in use
SW 38 Not in use
SW 39 Not in use
SW 40 Not in use
SW 41 Not in use
SW 42 Not in use
SW 43 Not in use
SW 44 Not in use
SW 45 Not in use
SW 46 Not in use
SW 47 Not in use
SW 48 Not in use
SW 49 Not in use
SW 50 Not in use

List of MENU
FAX model only

Menu switch registration mode


No. Parameter Selection
1 Not in use
2 Not in use
3 Not in use
4 Not in use
5 ON/OFF of NL equalizer 0: OFF 1: ON
6 Telephone line monitor 0-3
0: DIAL
1: SERVICEMAN 1
2: SERVICEMAN 2
3: OFF
7 Transmission level (ATT) 0-15
8 Upper limit of V.34 modulation speed 0-5
0: 3429BAUD
1: 3200BAUD
2: 3000BAUD
3: 2800BAUD
4: 2743BAUD
5: 2400BAUD
9 Upper limit of V.34 data speed 0-13
0: 33.6kbps
01:31.2
02:28.8
03:26.4
04:24.0
05:21.6
06:19.2
07:16.8
08:14.4
09:12.0
10:09.6

199
8. Service Mode

Menu switch registration mode


11:07.2
12:04.8
13:02.4
10 Pseudo-CI signal frequency 0-2
0: 50Hz
1: 25Hz
2: 17Hz
11 Not in use
12 Not in use
13 Not in use
14 Not in use
15 Not in use
16 Not in use
17 Not in use
18 Not in use
19 Not in use
20 Not in use

List of NUM
FAX model only

Numeric parameter setting mode


No. Parameter Allowable setting range
1 Not in use
2 RTN transmission criteria X 1 to 99%
3 RTN transmission criteria n 2 to 99 times
4 RTN transmission criteria m 1 to 99 lines
5 NCC pause (before ID code) 1 to 60s
6 NCC pause (after ID code) 1 to 60s
7 Not in use
8 Not in use
9 Not in use
10 T.30 T0 timer 55s principally
11 T.30 T1 timer (for incoming transmission) 0 to 9999 (France=3500, Oth-
ers=3000)
12 Maximum incoming lines 0 to 65535 (line)
0: without limitation
13 T.30 EOL timer 500 to 3000
(set to 55s by default)
14 Not in use
15 Threshold between hooking and on-hook 0 to 999
16 Lead time to the first response when switching between FAX and TEL 0 to 9
17 Duration to activate pseudo-RBT cadence 0 to 999
18 Duration to deactivate pseudo-RBT cadence (short) 0 to 999
19 Duration to deactivate pseudo-RBT cadence (long) 0 to 999
20 Duration to activate pseudo-ring cadence 0 to 999
21 Duration to deactivate pseudo-CI cadence (short) 0 to 999
22 Duration to deactivate pseudo-CI cadence (long) 0 to 999
23 CNG detection level when switching between FAX and TEL 0 to 7
24 Pseudo-RBT outgoing level when switching between FAX and TEL 10 to 20 (100v), 0 to 20 (120,
230v)
25 CNG monitor duration while the answering device is activated 0 to 999
26 No signal detection level while the answering device is activated 0 to 7

200
8. Service Mode

Numeric parameter setting mode


27 Duration to detect preamble of V21 low-speed flag 20 (*10ms)
28 Not in use
29 Not in use
30 Not in use
31 Not in use
32 Not in use
33 Not in use
34 Not in use
35 Not in use
36 Not in use
37 Not in use
38 Not in use
39 Not in use
40 Not in use
41 Not in use
42 Not in use
43 Not in use
44 Not in use
45 Not in use
46 Not in use
47 Not in use
48 Not in use
49 Not in use
50 Not in use
51 Threshold to detect hook 10 to 9999
52 Not in use
53 Set DTMF calling counts when receiving FAX remotely 0 to 9999(*25)
54 Set BusyTone outgoing duration when using handset 0 to 9999
55 Not in use
56 Not in use
57 Not in use
58 Not in use
59 Not in use
60 Not in use
61 Not in use
62 Not in use
63 Not in use
64 Not in use
65 Not in use
66 Not in use
67 Not in use
68 Not in use
69 Not in use
70 Not in use
71 Not in use
72 Not in use
73 Not in use
78 Exclusive use of a developer
79 Exclusive use of a developer
80 Exclusive use of a developer

201
8. Service Mode

Setting of NCU Parameters


■ TONE
Operation Method
1. Setting of Tone Parameters
NCU > TONE

Item Function Setting range


TONE 001 Tone signal sending time (PSTN) 10 to 9,999 msec
002 Minimum pause time (PSTN) 10 to 9,999 msec

■ PULSE
Operation Method
1. Setting of Pulse Parameters
NCU > PULSE

Item Function Setting range


PULSE PULSE FORM Pulse digit format 0 → DP(N)
1 → DP(N+1)
2 → DP( 10-N)
PULSE 001 Pulse dial speed(10pps) 5 to 300(×0.1pps)
NUM 002 Pulse dial speed(20pps) 5 to 300(×0.1pps)
003 Pulse dial make ratio 10 to 90 %
004 Minimum pause time 10 to 9,999 msec

● DIAL TONE
DIAL TONE
Bit Switch

Bit No. Function 1 0


Bit 0 Frequency detection method Modem Tonal counter
Bit 1 - - -
Bit 2 Signal frequency Changed Not changed
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 4 Judgment of intermittent signal start from valid ON signal start from either valid ON signal
or OFF signal
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 6 Signal form Continuous Intermittent
Bit 7 Signal detection Detected Not detected

Numeric value parameter

Parameter No. Function Setting range


001 T0 timer 0 to 9,999( x 10 msec)
002 T1 timer 0 to 9,999( x 10 msec)
003 T2 timer 0 to 9,999( x 10 msec)
004 T3 timer 0 to 9,999( x 10 msec)
005 T4 timer 0 to 9,999( x 10 msec)
006 Signal detection table 0 to 16
007 Signal detection level 0 to 7
008 Number of signal frequency 0 to 9,999

202
8. Service Mode

■ 2nd DIAL TONE


● 2nd DIAL TONE
Bit switch

Bit No. Function 1 0


Bit 0 Frequency detection method Modem Tonal counter
Bit 1 - - -
Bit 2 Signal frequency Changed Not changed
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 4 Judgment of intermittent signal Start from valid ON signal Start from either valid ON signal or
OFF signal
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 6 Signal form Continuous Intermittent
Bit 7 Signal detection Detected Not detected

Numeric value parameter

Parameter No. Function Setting range


001 T0 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
002 T1 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
003 T2 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
004 T3 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
005 T4 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
006 Signal detection table 0 to 16
007 Signal detection level 0 to 7
008 Number of valid tone detection 0 to 9999 (times)

■ BUSY TONE 0
● BUSY TONE 0
Bit switch

Bit No. Function 1 0


Bit 0 - - -
Bit 1 - - -
Bit 2 Signal frequency Changed Not changed
Bit 3 RBT signal detection Detected Not detected
Bit 4 Judgment of intermittent signal Start from valid ON signal Start from either valid ON signal or OFF
signal
Bit 5 RBT signal check cycle 1 cycle 1/2 cycle
Bit 6 Signal form Continuous Intermittent
Bit 7 Signal detection Detected Not detected

Numeric value parameter

Parameter No. Function Setting range


001 - -
002 T1 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
003 T2 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
004 T3 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
005 T4 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
006 Signal detection table 0 to 16
007 Signal detection level 0 to 7
008 Number of valid tone detection 0 to 9999 (times)

203
8. Service Mode

■ BUSY TONE 1
● BUSY TONE 1
Bit switch

Bit No. Function 1 0


Bit 0 - - -
Bit 1 - - -
Bit 2 Signal frequency Changed Not changed
Bit 3 RBT signal detection Detected Not detected
Bit 4 Judgment of intermittent signal Start from valid ON signal Start from either valid ON signal or
OFF signal
Bit 5 RBT signal check cycle 1 cycle 1/2 cycle
Bit 6 Signal form Continuous Intermittent
Bit 7 Signal detection Detected Not detected

Numeric value parameter

Parameter No. Function Setting range


001 - -
002 T1 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
003 T2 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
004 T3 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
005 T4 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
006 Signal detection table 0 to 16
007 Signal detection level 0 to 7
008 Number of valid tone detection 0 to 9999 (times)

■ REORDER TONE
● REORDER TONE
Bit switch

Bit No. Function 1 0


Bit 0 - - -
Bit 1 Signal detection method FED FR3
Bit 2 Signal frequency Changed Not changed
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 4 Judgment of intermittent signal Start from valid ON signal Start from either valid ON signal
or OFF signal
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 6 Signal form Continuous Intermittent
Bit 7 Signal detection Detected Not detected

Numeric value parameter

Parameter No. Function Setting range


001 - -
002 T1 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
003 T2 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
004 T3 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
005 T4 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
006 Signal detection table 0 to 16
007 Signal detection level 0 to 7
008 Number of valid tone detection 0 to 9999 (times)

204
8. Service Mode

■ MULTI
● MULTI
Numeric value parameter

Parameter No. Function Setting range


001 Not in use
002 Not in use
003 Not in use
004 Not in use

■ AUTO RX
● AUTO RX
Numeric value parameter

Parameter No. Function Setting range


001 CI ON time 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
002 Cl long off time 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
003 Cl off time 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
004 CL long off time 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
005 Cl MAX off time 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
006 Cl wait time 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
007 CI frequency 0 to 9999 (cycle)
008 CI frequency lower limit 0 to 9999 (Hz)
009 CI frequency upper limit 0 to 9999 (Hz)

■ CNG DETECT
● CNG DETECT
Numeric value parameter

Parameter No. Function Setting range


001 At F/T switching CNG MIN ON time 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
002 CNG MAX ON time 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
003 - -
004 - -
005 - -
006 Hit ratio 0 to 9999 (%)
007 At direct connecting to answer- CNG MIN ON time 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
008 ing phone CNG MAX ON time 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
009 Tolerable time of instantaneous interrup- 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
tion
010 - -
011 Number of detection 0 to 9999 (Times)
012 Hit ratio 0 to 9999 (%)

■ RKEY
● RKEY
Numeric value parameter

Parameter No. Function Setting range


001 Connection time of flash 0 to 9999 (x10ms)

205
8. Service Mode

Parameter No. Function Setting range


002 Connection time of grounding wire 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
003 - -

■ PBX DIAL TONE 1


● PBX DIAL TONE 1
Bit Switch

Bit No. Function 1 0


Bit 0 Frequency detection method Modem Tonal counter
Bit 1 - - -
Bit 2 Signal frequency Changed Not changed
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 4 Judgment of intermittent signal Start from valid ON signal Start from either valid ON signal
or OFF signal
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 6 Signal form Continuous Intermittent
Bit 7 Signal detection Detected Not detected

Numeric value parameter

Parameter No. Function Setting range


001 T0 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
002 T1 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
003 T2 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
004 T3 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
005 T4 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
006 Signal detection table 0 to 16
007 Signal detection level 0 to 9
008 Number of valid tone detection 0 to 9999 (times)

■ PBX BUSY TONE


● PBX BUSY TONE
Bit Switch

Bit No. Function 1 0


Bit 0 - - -
Bit 1 - - -
Bit 2 Signal frequency Changed Not changed
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 4 Judgment of intermittent signal Start from valid ON signal Start from either valid ON signal
or OFF signal
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 6 Signal form Continuous Intermittent
Bit 7 Signal detection Detected Not detected

Numeric value parameter

Parameter No. Function Setting range


001 - -
002 T1 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
003 T2 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
004 T3 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)

206
8. Service Mode

Parameter No. Function Setting range


005 T4 timer 0 to 9999 (x10ms)
006 Signal detection table 0 to 16
007 Signal detection level 0 to 9
008 Number of valid tone detection 0 to 9999 (times)

207
8. Service Mode

TESTMODE

PRINT
TESTMODE > PRINT
PG-TYPE Setting of PG number
Details To set the PG number of the test print.
Use case At trouble analysis
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply Key.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 8
0: Grid Bk
1: Halftone
2: Solid black
3: Solid white,
4: Solid black / Solid white
5: 2 dot 2 space (Length)
6: 2 dot 2 space (Side)
7: For R&D
8: For R&D
Default value 0
COUNT Setting of PG output quantity
Details To set the number of sheets for PG output.
Use case At trouble analysis
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply Key.
Display/adj/set range 1 to 99
Unit 1 sheet
Default value 1
PHASE Setting of PG 2-sided mode
Details To set 1-sided/2-sided print for PG output.
Even if 2-sided print is set for a machine that only supports 1-sided print, the setting
is disabled.
Use case At trouble analysis
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply Key.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: 1-sided, 1: 2-sided
Default value 0
DENS Adjustment of test print engine F value
Details To adjust the engine F value for the test print.
As the value is larger, the image gets darker.
Use case At trouble analysis
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press Apply Key.
Display/adj/set range -4 to 4
Default value 0
Supplement/memo F value: The value used as an index for indicating lens brightness
FEED Setting of paper source at test print
Details When outputting a test print
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply Key.
Display/adj/set range When performing printing with the Multi-purpose Tray, be sure to set the user mode
before executing the service mode.
To set the paper source at the time of test print output.
If this mode is set when there is no Cassette 2 (option Pickup Cassette), the output
is made from Cassette 1 (standard Pickup Cassette).
Display/adj/set range 0 to 2
0: Multi-purpose tray, 1: Cassette 1, 2: Cassette 2
Default value 1
START Output of test print
Details To output a test print with the PG pattern set in PG-TYPE, etc.

208
8. Service Mode

TESTMODE > PRINT


START Use case At trouble analysis
Adj/set/operate method Press Apply Key.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
Default value 0

FAX
MODEM

TESTMODE > FAX > MODEM


RELAY-1
Title NCU relay test 1
Details To test ON/OFF of relay and port switch of NCU.
This mode is disabled for an NCU with no relay and port switch.
Use case When analyzing the cause of a problem
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OFF key.
Caution Be sure to set the value back to OFF after the test.
Display/adj/set range ON/OFF
FREQ
Title Frequency test
Details To test whether the specified frequency is oscillated.
By closing or opening the DC circuit in accordance with the setting value, the
specified frequency is oscillated by the tone transmission function of the modem.
Check this with the speaker.
Use case When analyzing the cause of a problem
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value.
Caution Be sure to set the value back to Stop Key after the test.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 7
1: 462 Hz, 2: 1100 Hz, 3: 1300 Hz, 4: 1500 Hz, 5: 1650 Hz, 6: 1850 Hz, 7: 2100
Hz
G3TX
Title G3 signal transmission test
Details To test whether the specified G3 signal is transmitted.
By closing or opening the DC circuit in accordance with the setting value, the
specific G3 signal pattern is transmitted at the specified transmission speed by the
G3 signal transmission function of the modem.
Check this with the speaker.
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value.
Caution Be sure to set the value back to Stop Key after the test.
Display/adj/set range 1 : 300 bps, 2 : 2400 bps, 3 : 4800 bps, 4 : 7200 bps, 5 : 9600 bps, 6 : TC7200
bps, 7 : TC9600bps, 8 : 12000 bps, 9 : 14400 bps"
DTMFTX
Title DTMF transmission test
Details To test whether the specified DTMF signal is transmitted.
By closing or opening the DC circuit in accordance with the setting value, the
specified DTMF signal is transmitted by the DTMF transmission function of the
modem.
Check this with the speaker.
Adj/set/operate method 0 to 9 > * > # > Stop key
Caution Be sure to set the value back to Stop Key after the test.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 9, *, #0 to 12
0: OFF, 1: 1, 2: 2, 3: 3, 4: 4, 5: 5, 6: 6, 7: 7, 8: 8, 9: 9, 10: 0, 11: *, 12: #
Supplement/memo DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency): Signal method combining two specific fre-
quencies like a push-tone phone.
V34G3TX
Title V.34 G3 signal transmission test

209
8. Service Mode

TESTMODE > FAX > MODEM


Details To test whether the specified V.34 G3 signal is transmitted.
By closing or opening the DC circuit in accordance with the setting value, the
specific G3 signal pattern is transmitted at the specified transmission speed and
modulation speed by the G3 signal transmission function (V.34) of the modem.
Check this with the speaker.
A setting value other than 0 is indicated as a 3-digit integer (1st digit: modulation
speed, last 2 digits: transmission speed). A value other than the specified numer-
ical value is invalid.
Adj/set/operate method Select "Speed" > Stop key > Select "baud" > Stop key
Caution Be sure to set the value back to Stop key after the test.
Display/adj/set range • Speed
01 : 2400 bps, 02 : 4800 bps, 03 : 7200 bps, 04 :
9600 bps, 05 : 12000 bps, 06 : 14400 bps, 07 :
16800 bps, 08 : 19200 bps, 09 : 21600 bps, 10 :
24000 bps, 11 : 26400 bps, 12 : 28800 bps, 13 :
31200 bps, 14 : 33600 bps
• baud rate
1 : 2400 baud, 2 : 2743 baud, 3 : 2800 baud, 4 :
3000 baud, 5 : 3200 baud, 6 : 3429 baud

FACULTY

TESTMODE > FAX > FACULTY


G34800TX
Title G3 4800 bps signal transmission test
Details To test whether the G3 signal is transmitted at 4800 bps.
By closing or opening the DC circuit, the specific G3 signal pattern is transmitted
at 4800 bps by the G3 signal transmission function.
Check this with the speaker.
Adj/set/operate method Select "G34800TX" > Stop Key
Caution Be sure to set the value back to Stop key after the test.
Default value 0
DETECT1
Title Ring detection
Details To check the ON/OFF state of CI, FC, and hook from the line.
The detection results are displayed on the console (UART).
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting "DETECT1".
Caution Be sure to set the value back to Stop key after the test.
Supplement/memo CI (Calling Identification): Ring signal
UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter): Console
DETECT2
Title Calling tone detection test 1
Details To check calling tone signal and FED.
Set the CML relay to ON and detect the calling tone.
The detection results are displayed on the console (UART).
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting "DETECT2".
Caution Be sure to set the value back to Stop key after the test.
Default value 0
Supplement/memo CML (Connect Modem to Line) relay: Relay installed at the NCU (Network Control
Unit) Board to switch between the telephone and fax.
DETECT3
Title Calling tone detection test 2
Details To check calling tone signal and FED.
Set the CML relay to OFF and detect the calling tone.
The detection results are displayed on the console (UART).
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting "DETECT3".
Caution Be sure to set the value back to Stop key after the test.
Default value 0

210
8. Service Mode

TESTMODE > FAX > FACULTY


Supplement/memo CML (Connect Modem to Line) relay: Relay installed at the NCU (Network Control
Unit) Board to switch between the telephone and fax.

211
9 Installation
How to check this Installation
Procedure...................................... 213
Checking Before Installation............. 214
Unpacking......................................... 215
Checking the Contents......................216
Installation Procedure....................... 217
Platen Cover Type-X.........................221
Heater Kit-M2.................................... 223
Cassette Heater Unit-40....................229
Handset-K1 Installation Procedure... 235
9. Installation

How to check this Installation Procedure

Symbols in the Illustration


The frequently-performed operations are described with symbols in this procedure.

Screw

1x 1x 1x 1x

Packaged Item Unused Parts Install Remove Tighten Loosen

Harness Connector Power Cord


(Common for Guides and Clamps)

1x 1x 1x 1x

Install Remove Connect Disconnect Connect Disconnect

Power

ON OFF Check the sound Check visually Check Push Cleaning

Illustrations Used in This Procedure


Illustrations used in this procedure are those of FAX model unless otherwise specified.

213
9. Installation

Checking Before Installation


The installation site must satisfy the conditions given below.
Therefore, it is recommended that the installation site be looked over before delivering the Host Machine to the customer.

Checking Power Supply


1. The Host Machine must singly connect to the following outlet according to the model.
• 120-127V/4.6A
• 220-240V/2.7A (Network Model)
• 220-240V/2.4A

2. Install the Host Machine near the power outlet and leave sufficient space around the power plug so that it can be
unplugged easily in an emergency.

Checking the Installation Environment


1. The environment of the installation site must be in the range as shown below. Avoid installation near the faucet, water boiler,
humidifier or refrigerator.
Guaranteed range for operation/image; Temperature: 10.0 to 30.0 deg C, Humidity: 20 to 80%
2. The Host Machine must not be installed near a source of fire or in an area subject to dust or ammonium gas. If the area is
exposed to direct rays of the sun, provide curtains to the window.
3. Be sure to provide adequate ventilation of the room to keep the work environment comfortable. Room odor can be bothering
when running the machine for a long time in a poorly-ventilated room although the ozone amount generated while running
the Host Machine does not harm human health.

Checking Installation Space


The space required for installation and maintenance work is shown below.

100mm or more

1285mm

553mm
1022.9mm

Points to Note on Installation


Be sure to go through the following before starting the work.
1. Imaging faults can result due to dew condensation that occurs when the Host Machine is moved from a cold place to warm
place. Leave the unpacked machine as it is for at least two hours before installing it. (Dew condensation: When a metallic
object is brought from a low-temperature place to a high-temperature place, water vapor around it is cooled abruptly and
consequently water drops stick to the surface of the metallic object.)
2. The maximum weight of the Host Machine is approx. 42kg (FAX model). Accordingly, two or more persons are required to
lift the Host Machine. Be sure to keep the Host Machine in a horizontal position when lifting it.
3. This product was designed considering the potential connection to the Norwegian IT power distribution system.

214
9. Installation

Unpacking
4. Remove the Cassette.

Unpacking

NOTE:
When installing a Cassette Feeding Module, be sure to
place the Host Machine on the Cassette Feeding Module.
(About the procedure for installing the Cassette Feeding
Module, refer to the Cassette Feeding Module Installation
Procedure.)

1. Unpack the machine.

5. Hold the part of the Host Machine as shown in the


2. Take out the accessories, and then remove the two illustration, carry it to the installation site.
cushioning materials.

CAUTION:
NOTE: Be careful not to lost the balance when lifting as the left
The Toner Cartridge may not be supplied depending on side of the Host Machine is heavier than its center.
the models.

6. Remove all the fixed tapes on each part.

7. Remove the protection sheet on the Control Panel.


3. Remove the two cushioning materials, and then pull
down the plastic bag.

Protection Sheet

215
9. Installation

Checking the Contents


Check that none of the included parts is missing.

CAUTION:
• Hand the supplied USB cable to a user, and then explain the usage of the USB to refer to user's guide.
• Hand the supplied LAN cable to a user, and then explain the usage of the LAN to refer to user's guide.
• When the length of the LAN cable is not enough, explain that purchase the cable (the shield type more than Category
5) of the Off-the-Shelf Items and use it to the user.

[1] Toner Cartridge x 1 [2]USB Cable x 1 [3]LAN Cable x 1


(for Korea/Taiwan and for (for Network Model) (for Network Model
Local Print Model of EU) except EU/ India/
Latin America)

[4] Telephone Cord x1 [5] Telephone Cord x1 [6]PTT Plug x1


(2-Contact type) (6-Contact type) (For EU, Use in Germany)
Fax Model only Fax Model only Fax Model only

[7]PTT Plug x1 [8]PTT Plug x1 [9] PTT Cable x1


(For EU, Use in France) (For EU, Use in UK) (For Korea)
Fax Model only Fax Model only Fax Model only

[10] Power Cord x 1

(for EU/Asia/Korea/
(for Taiwan/Latin America (120V)) (for India (230V))
Latin America (230V))

<Others>
Including guides

216
9. Installation

Installation Procedure
4. While holding the Toner Cartridge, pull the seal to
remove it.
Installing the Toner Cartridge

1. Open the Front Cover of the Host Machine.

Seal

5. Turn the Toner Cartridge in the direction of the arrow


until it stops.
2. Shake the Toner Cartridge 5-6 times.

6. Close the Front Cover of the Host Machine.


3. Insert the Toner Cartridge.

Setting the Cassettes

1. Push down the metal plate to lock it.

217
9. Installation

Connecting the cord


2. While squeezing the Side Guide Lever, slide the Side
Guide Plate to the desired paper size.
NOTE:
And then while squeezing the Rear Edge Guide Lever,
Install the optional platen cover or the DADF on the
slide the Rear Edge Guide Plate to the desired paper
machine when the Host Machine is the model that the
size. platen cover or the DADF have not been installed. Refer
to the DADF or Platen Cover Installation Procedure for
installing it.

1. Insert the connector of the power cord into the AC


inlet of the Host Machine and the outlet.

Rear Edge Guide Lever


Side Guide Lever

3. Set paper in the cassette.

Paper

4. Return the cassette to the Host Machine.


Host Machine Settings (Start
Setup Guide)
The Start Setup Guide screen appears when the power is
turned ON for the first time after the Host Machine is installed.
Follow the instructions displayed on the display to configure
the settings of the Host Machine.

1. Turn ON the main power switch.


Toner supply and stirring operations start automatically.
(For approx. 1 to 2 minutes)

218
9. Installation

Connecting to Telephone Line


2. Follow the instructions displayed on the display to
perform the following settings. (Fax Model only)
• Select the appropriate language.
• Select the location. ■ Preparation of Telephone Cord (EU
• Select the Time Zone. only)
• Enter the Date and Time.
• Register business card of service representative
for consumables.
• Setting the Remote UI Access PIN. 1. When using the PTT Plug, connect the PTT Plug
• Setting the wireless LAN. matched the field or area to the Telephone Cord (6-
contact type).

3. Place the original on the copyboard glass, and then NOTE:


copy it by feeding paper from the cassette and • This step performs only for Europe.
• Do not connect the Telephone Cord (2-contact type)
manual-feed tray to check the operation and the
with the PTT Plug.
resultant print image.
• Check that the abnormal sound is not generated.
• Check the image quality at respective
magnifications.
• Check that the document is copied normally on the
specified number of sheets.
• When image adjustment is necessary, refer to the
chapter of the adjustment.

1x
Connecting to the Network
(Network Model only)
This steps perform only for Network Model.

1. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch, and connect the


LAN Cable to the LAN port of the Host Machine and ■ Basic Setting
the Router, and then turn ON the Main Power Switch.

NOTE:
NOTE: When “System Manager Information Settings” is set, be
Skip this step when setting the wireless LAN in the Start sure to follow the direction of user administrator in order
Setup Guide. to log in as an administrator.

In this steps, make only minimum settings required for FAX


communication.
2. Turn ON the Main Power Switch.

1. Turn ON the Main Power Swith.


3. Inform the system administrator at the installation
site that installation of the Host Machine is complete,
and then ask for the network setting.

NOTE:
Network setting cannot be executed unless logging in as
an administrator. Factory default password is as follows.
• Manager ID : 7654321
• PIN : 7654321

219
9. Installation

2. Specify the initial Fax Settings.


Menu > Fax Settings> Fax Setup Guide > Set Up Now

NOTE:
When stopping the Fax Settings on the way, push the Stop
Key to exit the fax setup screen.

Follow the instructions on the screen to specify a fax


number, a unit name, and a receive mode. Refer to the
User's Guides for details about each mode.
<How to use a user name>
When you send a document, the sender information that
you registered is printed on the recipient’s paper.

3. When <Connect Telephone Line> appears on the


display, connect the telephone cable as the
following illustration.

1x

Handset
Telephone

Telephone line connector

■ Fax communication test


Perform the communication test to check if FAX function
works correctly.

1. Switch the control panel display to [Fax] screen.

2. Send the test document from this machine to


another machine that can handle the
communication test to check that this machine can
send the data correctly.

3. Send the test document from the target to this


machine to check if the machine can receive the
document properly.

220
9. Installation

Platen Cover Type-X


1. When changing from DADF to Platen Cover, affix the
supplied Face Seal, and then remove the Face Seal
Checking Before Installation from the platen cover mount. (The removed face seal
will not be used.)

■ Check Items when Turning OFF the


NOTE:
Main Power For removing the DADF, refer to DADF service manual.

Check that the main power switch is OFF.


1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine.
2. Be sure that control panel display is turned OFF, and Face Seal
then disconnect the power plug from the outlet.

■ Installation Outline Drawing

Face Seal

Checking the Contents

[1] Platen Cover x1 [2] Face Seal x1


2. Install the Platen Cover.

Installation Procedure

CAUTION:
Check that the main power switch is OFF and the
power plug is disconnected from the outlet.

221
9. Installation

3. Close the Platen Cover.

4. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the


outlet.

5. Turn ON the main power of the host machine.

Checking after Installation


■ Disposal Parts Check
1. Following disposal parts are remained after
installation procedure.

[1] Removed face seal 1 pc.


(When changing from DADF to Platen
Cover.)
[2] Face Seal 1 pc.
(Except when changing from DADF to
Platen Cover.)

222
9. Installation

Heater Kit-M2 Checking the Contents

[1] Heater PCB Unit x1 [2] Heater Switch Unit x1


Checking Before Installation
■ Check Items when Turning OFF the
Main Power
Check that the main power switch is OFF.
[3] Cassette Heater [4] Relay Cable (short) x1
1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. Cable x1
2. Be sure that control panel display is turned OFF, and
then disconnect the power plug from the outlet.

■ Installation Outline Drawing


[5] Wire Saddle x1 [6] Screw (TP; M3x6) x3

[7] Relay Cable (long) x1

■ Product Name The part [7] is not used for imageRUNNER 2204/2004 series.
Safety regulations require the product's name to be <Others>
registered. In some regions where this product is sold, the Including guides
following name may be registered instead.
• F680260
Installation Procedure

CAUTION:
Check that the main power switch is OFF and the
power plug is disconnected from the outlet.

223
9. Installation

■ Preparation of the Host Machine


3. When FAX PCB is installed, loosen the 4 screws on
the FAX PCB and then remove it.
1. Remove the Rear Cover. • 1 Wire Saddle
• 4 Screws • 3 Connectors

4x 1x 3x 4x

Connector

Connector

Wire Saddle
2. When DADF is installed, free the DADF cables from
the guides.
• 1 Edge Saddle
• 1 Guide 4. Open the DADF or Platen Cover and remove the
Reader Rear Cover.

Guide
• 2 Claws

NOTE:
To avoid damage of the claws, use such a tool as the
screwdriver when removing the Reader Rear Cover.

Edge Saddle

Claw

2x

224
9. Installation

■ Installing the Heater Kit-M2


5. Remove the Right Cover.
• 1 Screw
1. Connect the Heater PCB Unit and Heater Switch Unit.
• 2 Wire Saddles
• 1 Connector
1x

Wire Saddle
2x

6. Cut off the face cover of the Environment Heater


Switch on the Right Cover with the side cutters.

CAUTION:
Be sure to remove the face cover properly so that no
burr is formed.

1x

Connector

225
9. Installation

2. Insert the Heater Switch Unit to the host machine, 3. Connect the connector of Heater Switch Unit to the
and then install the Heater PCB Unit. power supply PCB.
• 1 Hook • 1 Connector
• 2 Bosses
• 2 Screws(TP; M3x6)

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the power supply PCB by the
Heater Switch Unit.

TP; M3x6

Connector

1x

4. Install the Heater Switch Unit to the host machine.


• 2 Bosses
• 1 Screw (TP; M3x6)

Hook

TP; M3x6

1x

2x

226
9. Installation

5. Connect to the Relay Cable to the Heater PCB and 6. Install the Wire Saddle.
the controller PCB.
• 2 Connectors
• 1 Edge Saddle
• 2 Wire Saddles
• 1 Guide

Edge Saddle

2x
Connector

Wire Saddle
4x Guide

Wire Saddle
7. Connect the Cassette Heater Cable to the Heater
PCB.
• 1 Connector
• 1 Guide

1x

Connector

㻳㼡㼕㼐㼑
1x

227
9. Installation

8. Install the Cassette Heater Unit. (Refer to the


Cassette Heater Unit Installation Procedure.)

NOTE:
After installing Cassette Heater Unit, attaching the
followings;
• DADF cables (when DADF is installed)
• FAX PCB (When FAX is installed)
• Removed covers

Checking after Installation


■ Disposal Parts Check

1. Following disposal parts are remained after


installation procedure.
[1] Relay Cable (long) 1pc.
[2] Removed face cover 1pc.

228
9. Installation

Cassette Heater Unit-40 ■ Checking the Contents


[1] Cassette Heater Unit [2] Screw
x1 (P Tightening; M4x10) x1
Checking before Installation
■ Check Items When Turning OFF the
Main Power
Check that the main power switch is OFF.
1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine.
2. Be sure that the control panel display and the main
power lamp are both turned OFF and then disconnect ■ Connecting to the Host Machine
the power plug.

■ Installation Outline Drawing 1. Attach the Cassette Heater Unit.


• 1 Screw (P Tightening; M4x10)

■ Product Name
Safety regulations require the product's name to be
registered. In some regions where this product is sold, the
following names may be registered instead.
• F380480

Installation Procedure

CAUTION:
Check that the main power switch is OFF and the
power plug is disconnected from the outlet.

CAUTION:
The Heater Kit must be installed before installing the
Cassette Heater Unit.

229
9. Installation

2. Connect the harness [A] of the Cassette Heater Unit 4. Attach the removed right cover.
with the Cassette Heater Harness [C]. • 2 Protrusions
• 1 Wire Saddle • 1 Screw (RS Tightening; M3X8)
• 1 Connector

NOTE: 1x
The harness [B] is used to connect the Cassette Heater
Unit with the Cassette Feeding Module.

5. Attach the removed reader rear cover.


• 2 Claws

Claw

3. (When FAX is installed) Attach the removed FAX


PCB and then fasten the 4 screws.
• 3 Connectors
• 1 Wire Saddle

1x 3x 4x

Connector

Connector

Wire Saddle

230
9. Installation

■ Connecting to the Cassette Feeding


6. (When DADF is installed) Fit the harness band to the Module
guide and then fix the loosened DADF Cable.
• 1 Guide
• 1 Edge Saddle
1. Remove the rear cover from the Cassette Feeding
Module.
Harness Band • 2 Screws

Guide

2x
Edge Saddle

7. Attach the removed rear cover.


• 5 Protrusions
• 4 Screw (RS Tightening; M3X8)

4x

8. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the


external source.

9. Turn ON the main power switch.

10. Turn ON the heater switch.

231
9. Installation

2. Attach the Cassette Heater Unit to the Cassette 3. Remove the End Terminal from the Cassette Heater
Feeding Module. Harness on the host machine (the removed End
• 1 Screw (P Tightening; M4x10) Terminal is not used).
• 1 Connector

4. Connect the Cassette Heater Harness [B] on the host


machine to the harness [D] of the Cassette Heater
Unit on the Cassette Feeding Module and then fix
them.
• 1 Connector
• 1 Guide

232
9. Installation

5. (When FAX is installed) Attach the removed FAX 7. Attach the removed reader rear cover.
PCB and then fasten the loosened 4 screws. • 2 Claws
• 3 Connectors
• 1 Wire Saddle
Claw

1x 3x 4x

Connector

Connector

8. (When DADF is installed) Fit the harness band to the


guide and then fix the DADF Cable.
• 1 Guide
Wire Saddle • 1 Edge Saddle

Harness Band
6. Attach the removed right cover.
• 2 Protrusions
• 1 Screw (RS Tightening; M3X8)
Guide

1x
2x
Edge Saddle

9. Attach the removed Cassette Rear Cover.


• 2 Screws (P Tightening; M4X10)

2x

233
9. Installation

10. Attach the removed Rear Cover.


• 5 Protrusions
• 4 Screw (RS Tightening; M3X8)

4x

11. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the


external source.

12. Turn ON the main power switch.

13. Turn ON the heater switch.

Checking after Installation


■ Disposal Parts

1. Following disposal parts are remained after


installation procedure.

End Terminal Connec-


tor
[1] (When the Cassette 1 pc
Feeding Module is in-
stalled)

234
9. Installation

Handset-K1 Installation Installation Outline Drawing


Procedure

Points to Note on Installation


• Install this device to a model with the Fax function.
• This equipment and the Copy Card Reader cannot be
used at the same time.

Checking the Contents

1x

1x

Check Items when Turning


OFF the Main Power
Check that the main power switch is OFF.

1x 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host


1x
machine.

2. Be sure that Control Panel Display is turned OFF,


and then disconnect the power plug.

2x
M3x35
Installation Procedure
2x

<Others>
1
• Including guides

235
9. Installation

2 4

M3x35

1x

HAND SET

LINE

2x

2x

236
9. Installation

3.0 mm

1x

7
Connect the power plug to the outlet.

8
Turn ON the main power switch.

9
Check that the dial tone is heard from the Handset.

237
APPENDICES
Service Tools.................................... 239
General Timing Chart........................241
General Circuit Diagram....................242
Backup Data......................................246
Soft Counter Specifications...............248
Service Tools

Service Tools

Special Tools
Tool name Tool No. Rank (*) Shape Uses
Digital multimeter FY9-2002 A For making electrical checks.

Tester extension pin FY9-3038 A As an addition when making an


electrical check.

Tester extension pin (L-shipped) FY9-3039 A As an addition when making an


electrical check.

NA-3 Test Chart FY9-9196 A For checking and adjusting im-


ages.

A: each service engineer is expected to carry one.


B: each group of 5 service engineers is expected to carry one.
C: each workshop is expected to carry one.

Oils and Solvents


Name Uses Composition Remarks
Alcohol Cleaning; e.g., glass, plastic, rubber; Fluoride-family hydro- • Do not bring near fire.
external covers. carbon • Procure locally.
Alcohol • Substitute: IPA (isopropyl alcohol)
Surface activating
agent
Water
Alcohol Cleaning; e.g., metal; oil or toner stain. Fluoride-family hydro- • Do not bring near fire.
carbon • Procure locally
Chlorine-family hydro- • Substitute: MEK
carbon
Alcohol
Lubricating oil Lubrication; e.g., gears or the shaft of Special oil • Tool No.: HY9-0007 (20g)
(EM-50L) the CIS unit. Special solid
lubricating agent
Lithium soap
Lubricating oil Bushings (L/R) of the pressure roller Composition oil • Tool No.: CK-8012 (100g)
(HP-300)

239
Service Tools

Name Uses Composition Remarks


Conducting grease Contact plate spring, Developing Mineral oil • FLOIL GE-676
sleeve electrode • Tool No.: FY9-6023 (20g)

240
General Timing Chart

General Timing Chart

2 Prints, Continuous, Cassette 1


Main power switch ON Print command received

Sequence
WAIT STBY INTR PRINT LSTR
1 Main Motor (M202)

2 Fixing Motor (M201)

3 Polygon Motor (M203)

Cassette 1 Pickup Solenoid


4
(SL202)

5 Cassette Feed Clutch (CL202)

6 Laser

7 Pre-registration Sensor (SR207)

8 Delivery Sensor (SR203)

9 Registration Clutch (CL203)

10 Primary Charging AC Bias

11 Primary Charging DC Bias

12 Developing AC Bias

13 Developing DC Bias

14 Transfer Bias

15 *1 *1
Separation Static Eliminator Bias

*1: Cleaning Bias

241
General Circuit Diagram

General Circuit Diagram

General Circuit Diagram(1/4)


10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

FIXING UNIT
SW2 TH1 TH2 SR201 SR202 SR204 SR212
Left Cover Switch MT1 MT2 MT3 Fixing Main Fixing Sub Fixing Delivery Fixing Pressure Waste Toner SR203 Delivery Full
1 Thermistor Thermistor Sensor Release Sensor Full Sensor Delivery Sensor Detection Sensor

NO
F SOLD301 2 F

COM
2 1 J863

TH1
3 2 1 3 2 1
3 2 1 J866 3 2 1 -) 3 2 1

J870 J874 -

2
MT4 H1 H2
TP1 PCB9

2
Fixing Fixing

TP
Thermo Heater Sub J867DH -/ Wireless LAN PCB
-/)
Switch J865L 1 2 3 4

1
Heater

1
MT5
1 2 1 2 J868DH 1 2 3
J892 1 2 2 1 2 1 J868D J865DH -'+
3 2 1 4 3 2 1
1 2
J893 J865D 3 2 1 -'+ J26
E J867D E
-' -' 12 10 8 6 4 2
1 2 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
J862

J861M

SNS_FIX_P_IN
1 2 3

H_WAKEUP/
616B)$;B)8//
SNS PRESS

SDIO_CMD
616B(-(&7B3

SDIO_CLK
1 2 3 1 2 3

TH_AN_M

SDIO_D3

SDIO_D2

SDIO_D1

SDIO_D0
J861F

TH_AN_S
J890F

TH_DET

DGND

DGND

DGND
+3.3V

+3.3V
DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

'*1'

95

'*1'

PD/
+5R

+5R

+5R

+5R
N.C

5

1&

1&

1&
+24VU-IN
+24VR

N.C

N.C

N.C
H2

H1

H2
H1
H
H

        
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 3 5 7 9 11 13
J709 J706 -6) - 2 4 6 8 10 12
1 2 3 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1
D PSU_READY D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J906 J911 J902 For Standard J4
PSU_RLDRV
For 230V For 120V
PSU_ZX FAX Model
PSU_ESS
PCB1
TO J902
TO J911 PSU_FSRDR_M Controller PCB (1/3)

J703
For EU
J905

PSU_FSRDR_S
MT6 PSU_DOWN J714
H
N
N
H

28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
J707 J708
29 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

NC

SNS_REGI
DGND

+5R
+24VU
+24VU

N.C
PGND

PGND

/HVT PRDCFOT
DGND

HVT_PRDCPWM
+5V

/HVT_PRACFOT
DGND

/HVT_DVDCFOT
+3.3R_ECON
HVT_PRACON
HVT_DVACON

/HVT_DVACFOT
HVT_AN_TNRCHKD

HVT_AN_TNRCHKT
HVT_PRACCUR2

HVT_PRACCUR1
HVT_DVDCPWM

/HVT_DISPWM
/HVT_DISDCFOT
HVT_AN_PRACMONI

/HVT_TRPFOT
/HVT_TRPWM

HVT_AN_TRCRNT
/HVT_TRCHG

/HVT_TRNFOT

NC
SNS_LARGE_IN

DGND
+5R
SNS_CAS_P_IN

DGND
+5R
FT2

FT4

C C
J910
2
4
2 1

1 2
J909
1
2
3

FT1

FT3
1
3

SW1
P1

Power J877D 1 2 3
Switch J877DH
3 2 1
29 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 J877L
28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
J801
PCB2 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3
J880 J879 J878
Power Supply PCB
B (1/4) PCB3 B
HVT PCB
SR207 SR206 SR205
Except for EU Pre-registration Large Sensor Cassette 1
Sensor Paper Sensor
P2

JP1,2

JP3,4 JP7,8 JP9,10 JP5,6


3
2
1

Tr3

SW1
Power Switch DEVELOPMENT COPY

REMAINING
MT6
TO J902

DETECTION
1 2
A 3 4 MT6 NEUTRALIZATION
A
DRUM
FIX BIAS
CONTACT PLATE

CHARGE

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.1

242
General Circuit Diagram

General Circuit Diagram(1/4)


10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

M203 M201 M202


PCB5 Laser Scanner Unit Polygon Motor Fixing Motor Main Motor
Duplex PCB (1/2)
F PCB2 - 0 0 0
F
))&
- Power Supply       
         
     -     -
        -
PCB (2/3)        
        
       

For Entry Model For Standard Model


-( -6
                 
-/
          -'+
         
-'

E E

/$6(5B3B$&&
/$6(5B3B'(&
'*1'
'*1'
9B$//
9B$//

3*1'
98B1&8

3*1'
98

'*1'

'*1'
9B$//
9B$//

3*1'
98B1&8

3*1'
98
98

3*1'

/$6(5B&17

/$6(5B&17
/$6(5B&17

9B5&21

/$6(5B%',

5B(&21
/$6(5B)*

),;B%1

),;B$1

0B$&&
0B'(&
9'2

9''

95

3*1'

),;B%

),;B$
98

98
'*1'

9''
'*1'

'*1'

9''

'*1'
'*1'

3*1'

3*1'

0B)*
1&
-/     
                 
                           
          -'+       
- -
-' - -
-
For Entry Model For Standard Model
'83B7;'
'83B5;'

'83B&/.
'83B67%
'*1'

5B(&21

5
98

98
'*1'

'*1'

D PCB1 D
Controller PCB (2/4)
-
             
-

(19B$1B703

'*1'
(19B$1B+80

5B(&21
- - -
                         
'*1'
95
23&B21

5
'*1'

&67B'(7
616B23B&67B3
616B23B)(('

23&B'(7B287
'*1'

23&B&/
'*1'
'*1'

C C

95
&67B6/

95
5(*,B&/

95

)(('B&/
-    

616B/223B,1
'*1'
5

616B08/7,B3B,1
'*1'

5
95
08/7,B&/B'59

95
08/7,B6/B'59

)$1B/2&.
3*1'
98
-'+
HU1 -'
Environment Sensor -/

 
 
-'   -'   -'
-'+           -'
  
-/          
   -'+ -'+ -'+
          -/    
-/ -/
-
   
 
PCB6 6/ &/
B &/ B
1-Cassette Controller
PCB (1/2) SL202 CL203 CL202
Cassette 1 Pickup Registration Clutch Cassette Feed Clutch
  
-' Solenoid
   -'+
-/
-' -' -'
         -'+
-'+ -'+   
    
-
  
  
- &/ 6/
A A
SR210 CL201 SL201
SR211 Multi-purpose Tray Multi-purpose Tray Multi-purpose Tray FM1
Arch Sensor Paper Sensor Feed Clutch Pickup Solenoid Fixing Cooling Fan

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.2

243
General Circuit Diagram

General Circuit Diagram(3/4)


10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F To ADF Driver F
To ADF Driver PCB CN1 PCB CN10 To ADF Driver PCB CN2

CIS
-
            

             
USB LAN
E E
86%'(9,&( 1(7:25.

$')B&211(&7

$')B/$67B6B&
$')B&29(5B6
$')B(037<B6
&,6B02'(

$')B(;,7B6
$')B5($'B6
&,6B&/.

5,.$1B6/
.0B3:0B%

.0B3:0B$

50B3:0B%
50B3:0B$

$')B5(*B6
&,6B63

95

95

$')B/B6

$')B/B6
$')B:B6

$')B:B6
0',>@
0',>@

0',>@

0',>@

/('5
/('*

/('%
'(9B'0
'(9B'3

'*1'
9,1

'*1'
9,1
'*1'
9,1

'*1'

9,1

'*1'
9,1

'*1'

9,1
'*1'

'*1'

'*1'

'*1'

95()

'*1'

95

.0B%

.0B$

50B%

50B$
'*1'

.0B%

.0B$

50B%

50B$

95

95

1
9%86

'*1'

'*1'
'*1'

'*1'

'*1'

3*1'

3*1'

'*1'
D D
                                          
             
J5 J2              J351 J357 J355
-

PCB1
Controller PCB (3/4)
-
                J356 J354 J353
-
                  
      
   
C C

+3B6(16B&

'*1'
1
21(:,),B/,1.
7B,17
9
7B6',
'*1'
7B6'2
7B6&6
7B6&/.
'*1'
/&'B5(6(7
1
/&'B56
/&'B&6
/&'B6'2
/&'B6&.
'*1'
'*1'
1&
%8==(5
5
.(<B5
.(<B5
.(<B5
.(<B5
.(<B5
.(<B:
.(<B:
.(<B:
.(<B:
3B/('B:5
(66B/('
.(<B:

95

1&

$')B23(1B6
'*1'

1
*1'

$

$
%
%
 

-

PCB4
                J1101
Heater PCB (Option)
                   
  
- - -
      0 SR401   
B Copyboard Cover B
M301 SR402 Open/closed Sensor

+
PCB1 Reader Motor Contact Sensor (ADF option)

-
Control Panel PCB

-
62/' 62/'
SW100 HP Sensor



Cassette Heater
Switch







(Option)








62/' 62/'

+
H6 H7
  
Cassette 1 Cassette 2
A - A
Heater Heater
PCB2 (Option)
Power Supply PCB (Option)
(3/3)

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.3

244
General Circuit Diagram

General Circuit Diagram(4/4)


10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F F

SW501 SL501 SR501 SR502


Cassette 2 Size Cassette 2 Cassette 2 Cassette 2
Detection Switch Pickup Solenoid Paper Sensor Feed Sensor
6/
  - -
-      
E      E
-/
-'+  
-'  
PCB1
M501 M502 Controller PCB (4/4)
SR503
Duplex Motor Reverse Motor Duplex Feed Sensor -
0 0 - -    
   
- - -    
          

-/

32:(5B'(7

'*1'
9

'*1'

+5/

&,
&,

+22.
/,1(B7,3B%

/,1(B5,1*B%
         

9287

9287
-'+          
D -' D

CL501
Cassette 2

23B&67B3B616

23B)(('B616
Drive Clutch
'83/(;B616

616B32:

616B32:
&/

6/B21
616B32:

   

9
 

6:
6:
*1'
6:
6:

*1'

*1'
-    
*1'

SP1
$

%

$

%
$

 

Speaker -
          -/
 
PCB8
            - &7 -'+   FAX PCB
- - - -'
C C

-
PCB5 PCB6
Duplex PCB (2/2) 1-Cassette Controller 95

 
PCB (2/2) 23&B&/
07 07

ᮏయ*1'

B B

A A

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.4

245
Backup Data

Backup Data

Backup Data
Data Re- CLEAR User Backup Service Backup
place-
ment
User function > Initialize Menu COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR
Initialize Settings / Registration
Main System Initializ- Initializing Initializing Department ERR R-CON COUN HIST *2 ALL ERDS- Yes/No Method Location to be Yes/No Method Location
Con- Man- ing Ad- Menu Menu > In- ID Counter TER DAT stored to be stor-
troller age- dress itialize All All Clear ed
PCB *1 ment Book
Set-
tings
Menu Network Settings Clear - - Clear Clear - - - - - Clear - No - - No - -
System Management Settings Clear Clear - Clear Clear - - - - - Clear *3 - No - - No - -
Device Information Settings Clear - - Clear Clear - - - - - Clear - No - - No
Department ID Registraton Clear - - Clear Clear - - - - - Clear - No - - No - -
Department ID Counter Clear - - - Clear "Clear *5" - - - - Clear - No - - No - -
Department ID Settings Clear - - Clear Clear - - - - - Clear - No - - No - -
Security Settings Clear - - Clear Clear - - - - - Clear - No - - No - -
Select Country/Region Clear - - Clear Clear - - - - - Clear - No - - No - -
Remote UI Settings Clear - - Clear Clear - - - - - Clear - No - - No - -
Auto Online for Remote Scan Clear - - Clear Clear - - - - - Clear - No - - No - -
Restrict TX Function Clear - - Clear Clear - - - - - Clear - No - - No - -
Display Job Log Clear - - Clear Clear - - - - Clear Clear - No - - No - -
Use as USB Device Clear - - Clear Clear - - - - - Clear - No - - No - -
Google Cloud Print Settings Clear - - Clear Clear - - - - - Clear - No - - No - -
PDL Selection (Plug and Play) Clear - - Clear Clear - - - - - Clear - No - - No - -
Update Firmware Clear - - - Clear - - - - - Clear - No - - No - -
Address Book Clear - Clear - Clear - - - - - Clear - Yes RUI PC No - -
Serial Number - - - - - - - - - - - - No - - No - -
Total Counter - - - - - - - - - - - - No - - No - -
Error Code Clear - - - - - Clear - - - Clear - No - - No - -
Reader / ADF Adjustment Set- Clear - - - - - - Clear - - Clear - No - - No - -
tings
Service Counter Clear - - - - - - - Clear - Clear - No - - No - -
*4
communication management/ Clear - - - - - - - - Clear Clear - No - - No - -
print/jam/error alarm log
Embedded-RDS Settings Clear - - - - - - - - - Clear Clear No - - No - -
Toner level counter*6 - - - - - - - - - - - - No - - No - -

*1: Log data such as Mac address, USB serial number, printer-related setting values, scanner-related setting values, user data, and logs are initialized.
*2.The logs (communication management, print, jam, error, and alarm) are cleared.
*3.The system administrator ID and the password are changed back to the default values. ID: 7654321 / PWD: 7654321.
*4
-Setting of department ID count all clear.
-When preventing the count value from being cleared carelessly.
SERVICE MODE→COPIER→FUNCTION→SPLMAN→SPL93822
0: Enabled (Display), 1: Disabled (Hide)
Default value:0
*5
To set whether to disable clearing of department ID count.
SERVICE MODE→COPIER→FUNCTION→SPLMAN→SPL78788
0: Enabled (Display), 1: Disabled (Hide)

246
Backup Data

Default value: 0
*6
-ON/OFF of toner replacement counter display.
Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
COPIER→OPTION→USER→TNRB-SW
1(Display: Default), 0 (Hide)
- Display the Toner Bottle replacement counter

247
Soft Counter Specifications

Soft Counter Specifications

Soft Counter Specifications


The numbers entered for software counters are classified as follows

No. Counter Details


000 to 199 Total
200 to 299 Copy
300 to 399 Print
400 to 499 Copy and print
500 to 599 Scan
600 to 699 Memory media print
700 to 799 Reception print
800 to 899 Report print
900 to 999 Transmission

COUNTER 2 to 6 can be changed from the service mode (COPIER > OPTION > USER > CNT-SW).
Meanings of symbols in tables
• Numbers 1, 2 indicated under "Counter Details": Number of counts for large size paper
• It can be changed by the service mode (COPIER > OPTION > USER > B4-L-CNT) so that the paper larger than B4 size can be counted as large size paper.
• Copy: Local copy
• Copy A: Local copy
• Print: PDL print + report print
• Print A: PDL print + report print
• Scan: Black and white scan + color scan
*This product does not have the function of "Remote Copy" and "Box Print".

No. Counter Name


071 Toner Bottle (Black) *
101 Total 1
102 Total 2
103 Total (Large)
104 Total (Small)
108 Total (Black1)
109 Total (Black2)
112 Total (Black / Large)
113 Total (Black / Small)
114 Total 1 (2-Sided)
115 Total 2 (2-Sided)
116 Large (2-Sided)
117 Small (2-Sided)
126 Total A1
127 Total A2
128 Total A (Large)
129 Total A (Small)
132 Total A (Black1)
133 Total A (Black2)
136 Total A (Black / Large)
137 Total A (Black / Small)
138 Total A1 (2-Sided)
139 Total A2 (2-Sided)
140 Large A (2-Sided)
141 Small A (2-Sided)
150 Total B1
151 Total B2

248
Soft Counter Specifications

No. Counter Name


152 Total B (Large)
153 Total B (Small)
156 Total B (Black1)
157 Total B (Black2)
160 Total B (Black / Large)
161 Total B (Black / Small)
162 Total B1 (2-Sided)
163 Total B2 (2-Sided)
164 Large B (2-Sided)
165 Small B (2-Sided)
194 Toner replacement /Black *1
201 Copy (Total 1)
202 Copy (Total 2)
203 Copy (Large)
204 Copy (Small)
205 CopyA (Total 1)
206 CopyA (Total 2)
207 CopyA (Large)
208 CopyA (Small)
209 Local Copy (Total 1)
210 Local Copy (Total 2)
211 Local Copy (Large)
212 Local Copy (Small)
221 Copy (Black1)
222 Copy (Black2)
227 Copy (Black / Large)
228 Copy (Black / Small)
237 Copy (Black / Large / 2-Sided)
238 Copy (Black / Small / 2-Sided)
249 CopyA (Black1)
250 CopyA (Black2)
255 CopyA (Black / Large)
256 CopyA (Black / Small)
265 CopyA (Black / Large / 2-Sided)
266 CopyA (Black / Small / 2-Sided)
277 Local Copy (Black1)
278 Local Copy (Black2)
283 Local Copy (Black / Large)
284 Local Copy (Black / Small)
293 Local Copy (Black / Large / 2-Sided)
294 Local Copy (Black / Small / 2-Sided)
301 Print (Total 1)
302 Print (Total 2)
303 Print (Large)
304 Print (Small)
305 Print A (Total 1)
306 Print A (Total 2)
307 Print A (Large)
308 Print A (Small)
313 Print (Black1)
314 Print (Black2)
319 Print (Black / Large)
320 Print (Black / Small)
329 Print (Black / Large / 2-Sided)

249
Soft Counter Specifications

No. Counter Name


330 Print (Black / Small / 2-Sided)
331 PDLPrint (Total 1)
332 PDLPrint (Total 2)
333 PDLPrint (Large)
334 PDLPrint (Small)
339 PDLPrint (Black1)
340 PDLPrint (Black2)
345 PDLPrint (Black / Large)
346 PDLPrint (Black / Small)
355 PDLPrint (Black / Large / 2-Sided)
356 PDLPrint (Black / Small / 2-Sided)
403 Copy + Print (Black / Large)
404 Copy + Print (Black / Small)
405 Copy + Print (Black2)
406 Copy + Print (Black1)
411 Copy + Print (Large)
412 Copy + Print (Small)
413 Copy + Print (2)
414 Copy + Print (1)
421 Copy + Print (Black / Large / 2-Sided)
422 Copy + Print (Black / Small / 2-Sided)
501 Scan (Total 1)
505 BlackScan (Total 1)
506 BlackScan (Total 2)
507 BlackScan (Large)
508 BlackScan (Small)
509 Color Scan (Total 1)
510 Color Scan (Total 2)
511 Color Scan (Large)
512 Color Scan (Small)
701 Receive Print (Total 1)
702 Receive Print (Total 2)
703 Receive Print (Large)
704 Receive Print (Small)
709 Receive Print (Black1)
710 Receive Print (Black2)
715 Receive Print (Large / Small)
716 Receive Print (Black / Small)
725 Receive Print (Black / Large / 2-Sided)
726 Receive Print (Black / Small / 2-Sided)
801 Report Print (Total 1)
802 Report Print (Total 2)
803 Report Print (Large)
804 Report Print (Small)
809 Report Print (Black1)
810 Report Print (Black2)
815 Report Print (Black / Large)
816 Report Print (Black / Small)
939 Remote Scan (Color)
940 Remote Scan (Black)

*
-Settings of Counter 2 to 6 which are service mode items are not supported.
-Display can be switched in COPIER > OPTION > USER > TNRB-SW.
(the Remote-UI indication is non-support)

250

S-ar putea să vă placă și